Method and system for converting a single-threaded software program into an application-specific supercomputer

ABSTRACT

The invention comprises (i) a compilation method for automatically converting a single-threaded software program into an application-specific supercomputer, and (ii) the supercomputer system structure generated as a result of applying this method. The compilation method comprises: (a) Converting an arbitrary code fragment from the application into customized hardware whose execution is functionally equivalent to the software execution of the code fragment; and (b) Generating interfaces on the hardware and software parts of the application, which (i) Perform a software-to-hardware program state transfer at the entries of the code fragment; (ii) Perform a hardware-to-software program state transfer at the exits of the code fragment; and (iii) Maintain memory coherence between the software and hardware memories. If the resulting hardware design is large, it is divided into partitions such that each partition can fit into a single chip. Then, a single union chip is created which can realize any of the partitions.

This application claims priority, as a continuation application, to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/411,116 filed on Aug. 25, 2021, which claims priority, as a continuation application, to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/819,405 filed on Mar. 16, 2020, now U.S. Pat. No. 11,132,186, which claims priority, as a continuation application, to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/166,164 filed on Oct. 22, 2018, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,642,588, which claims priority, as a continuation application, to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/257,319 filed on Sep. 6, 2016, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,146,516, which claims priority, as a continuation application, to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/581,169 filed on Dec. 23, 2014, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,495,223, which claims priority, as a continuation application, to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/296,232 filed on Nov. 15, 2011, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,966,457. 17/411,116, 16/819,405, 16/166,164, 15/257,319, 14/581,169, 13/296,232, 11,132,186, 10,642,588, 10,146,516, 9,495,223 and 8,966,457 are hereby incorporated by reference.

REFERENCES CITED Related Co-Pending, Co-Owned US Patent US Patents

U.S. patent application Ser. No. Date Title Inventors Assignee Non Filed Storage Kultursay Global provisional Jun. 9, unsharing et al. Super- application 2011 computing Ser. No. Corporation 13/156,881 U.S. Patents U.S. Pat. No. Date Title Inventors Assignee 7,111,274 B1 September Scheduling Edwards Xilinx, Inc. 2006 hardware et al. generated by High-Level Language compilation to preserve functionality of source code design implementation 7,315,991 B1 January Compiling Bennett Xilinx, Inc. 2008 HLL into massively pipelined systems 7,409,670 B1 August Scheduling Pritchard Altera 2008 logic on a et al. Corporation programmable device implemented using a high- level language 7,219,342 B2 May 2007 Software to Metzgen Altera hardware Corporation compiler 7,761,687 B2 July 2010 Ultrascalable Blumrich International petaflop et al. parallel Business supercomputer Machines Corporation 7,577,822 B2 August Parallel task Vorbach Pact XPP 2009 operation in Technologies processor and AG reconfigurable coprocessor configured based on information in link list including termination information for synchronization 2008/0120497 May 2008 Automated Chai et Motorola, configuration al. INC. of a processing system using decoupled memory access and computation 2009/0006769 January Programmable Blumrich International 2009 partitioning for et al. Business high- Machines performance Corporation coherence domains in a multiprocessor system 5,761,515 June 1998 Branch on Barton International cache hit/miss III et Business for compiler al. Machines assisted delay Corporation tolerance 6,031,992 February Combining Cmelik et Transmeta 2000 hardware and al. Corporation software for providing an improved processor 5,542,075 July 1996 Method and Ebcioglu International apparatus for et al. Business improving Machines performance of Corporation out of sequence load operations in a computer system. 5,386,562 January Circular Jain et al. MIPS 1995 scheduling Computer method and Systems, apparatus for Inc. executing computer programs by moving independent instructions out of a loop

OTHER PUBLICATIONS

-   [1] M. V. Wilkes, J. B. Stringer, 1953. Microprogramming and the     design of the control circuits in an electronic digital computer.     Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc., pt. 2, vol. 49, pp. 230-238,     April, 1953.     http://researchn.micrsoft.com/en-us/um/people/gbell/computer_structures_principles_and_examples/csp0174.htm -   [2] Joseph A. Fisher, 1979. Optimization of horizontal microcode     within and beyond basic blocks. An application of processor     scheduling with resources. Courant Mathematics and Computing     Laboratory. Department of Energy report COO-1077-161. October 1979.     http://www.archive.org/stream/optimizationofho00fish -   [3] P. P. Chang, S. A. Mahlke, W. Y. Chen, N.J. Warter, and W. W.     Hwu, “IMPACT: An Architectural Framework for     Multiple-Instruction-Issue Processors”, in Proc. ISCA, 1991, pp.     266-275. -   [4] Scott A. Mahlke, David C. Lin, William Y. Chen, Richard E. Hank,     Roger A. Bringmann. Effective compiler support for predicated     execution using the hyperblock. In Proceedings of MICRO'1992. pp.     45-54 -   [5] M. Budiu, G. Venkataramani, T. Chelcea, and S. C. Goldstein,     “Spatial computation”, in Proc. ASPLOS, 2004, pp. 14-26. -   [6] G. S. Sohi, S. E. Breach, and T. N. Vijaykumar, “Multiscalar     Processors”, in Proc. ISCA, 1995, pp. 414-425. -   [7] K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu. A Compilation Technique for Software     Pipelining of Loops with Conditional Jumps. Proc. 20th Workshop on     Microprogramming, pp. 69-79, ACM Press, December 1987. -   [8] K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu. Some Design Ideas for a VLIW     Architecture for Sequential Natured Software. Parallel Processing     (Proc. IFIP WG 10.3 Working Conference on Parallel Processing), M.     Cosnard, M. H. Barton, M. Vanneschi (eds.), pp. 3-21, North     Holland, 1988.     http://global-supercomputing.com/people/kemal.ebcioglu/pdf/Ebeioglu-IFIP88.pdf -   [9] K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu and R. Groves, Some Global Compiler     Optimizations and Architectural Features for Improving Performance     of Superscalars, Research Report no. RC16145, IBM T. J. Watson     Research Center, Yorktown Heights, N Y, 1990. (Presented at the     ICCD-1990 conference).     http://global-supercomputing.com/people/kemal.ebcioglu/pdf/RC16145.pdf -   [10] S. M. Moon, K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu. Parallelizing     Non-Numerical Code with Selective Scheduling and Software     Pipelining. ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems,     November 1997, Vol. 19, No. 6, pp. pp. 853-898, ACM Press. -   [11] K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu and T. Nakatani, A New Compilation     Technique for Parallelizing Loops with Unpredictable Branches on a     VLIW Architecture. In Languages and Compilers for Parallel     Computing, D. Gelernter, A. Nicolau, and D. Padua (eds.), Research     Monographs in Parallel and Distributed Computing, pp. 213-229, MIT     Press, 1990. -   [12] João M. P. Cardoso, Pedro C. Diniz. Compilation Techniques for     Reconfigurable Architectures. Springer, 2008. 223 p. -   [13] R. M. Tomasulo. An Efficient Algorithm for Exploiting Multiple     Arithmetic Units, IBM Journal of Research and Development,     11(1):25-33, January 1967 -   [14] K. Sankaralingam, R. Nagarajan, P. Gratz, R. Desikan, D.     Gulati, H. Hanson, C. Kim, H. Liu, N. Ranganathan, S.     Sethumadhavan, S. Sharif, P. Shivakumar, W. Yoder, R.     McDonald, S. W. Keckler, and D. C. Burger. “The Distributed     Microarchitecture of the TRIPS Prototype Processor,” 39th     International Symposium on Microarchitecture (MICRO), December,     2006. -   [15] Keith D. Cooper and John Lu. Register Promotion in C Programs.     Proc. ACM SIGPLAN Conf Programming Language Design and     Implementation (PLDI-97), 1997, pp. 308-319, ACM Press. -   [16] Kevin B. Theobald, Guang R. Gao, and Laurie Hendren. On the     limits of program parallelism and its smoothability. Proc. MICRO-25,     1992, pp. 10-19. -   [17] K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu, E. R. Altman, S. Sathaye, and M.     Gschwind. Optimizations and Oracle Parallelism with Dynamic     Translation. Proc. MICRO-32, Haifa, Israel, December 1999. -   [18] Lawrence Livermore National Labs POSIX threads tutorial.     https://computing.llnl.gov/tutorials/pthreads/ -   [19] C-to-HDL. Wikipedia article.     http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/C_to_HDL -   [20] David J. Kuck. The structure of computers and computations.     Wiley, 1978. 511 p. -   [21] D.A. Padua, D. J. Kuck, and D. H. Lawrie, “High-Speed     Multiprocessors and Compilation Techniques”, IEEE Trans. Computers,     1980, pp. 763-776. -   [22] Milind Girkar and Constantine D. Polychronopoulos, Automatic     Extraction of Functional Parallelism from Ordinary Programs. IEEE     transactions on parallel and distributed systems, Vol. 3, No. 2,     March 1992, pp. 166-178. -   [23] E. Dijkstra. Cooperating Sequential Processes. 1965. EWD 123.     http://www.cs.utexas.edu/˜EWD/transcriptions/EWD01xx/EWD123.html -   [24] G. Lee, C. P. Kruskal, and D. J. Kuck, “The Effectiveness of     Automatic Restructuring on Nonnumerical Programs”, in Proc. ICPP,     1985, pp. 607-613. -   [25] Frances Allen, Michael Burke, Ron Cytron, Jeanne Ferrante,     Wilson Shieh, Vivek Sarkar, A framework for determining useful     parallelism. Proc. Second International Conference on     Supercomputing, ICS 88, ACM, New York. Pp. 207-215. -   [26] J. Ferrante, K. Ottenstein, and K. Warren. The program     dependence graph and its use in optimization. ACM Transactions on     Programming Languages and Systems. Pp. 319-349. July 1987. -   [27] J. Llosa, A. Gonzalez, E. Ayguade, and M. Valero. Swing Modulo     Scheduling: a lifetime-sensitive approach. Proc. PACT '96. -   [28] Wikipedia. Prefix Sum article.     http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Prefix_sum -   [29] Wikipedia. Loop Splitting article.     http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Loop_splitting -   [30] Wikipedia. Hypergraph article.     http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hypergraph -   [31] Engin Demir, Cevdet Aykanat, B. Barla Cambazoglu. Clustering     spatial networks for aggregate query processing: A hypergraph     approach. Information Systems 33 (2008) 1-17.     http://www.cs.bilkent.edu.tr/˜aykanat/papers/08IS.pdf -   [32] High Performance Fortran Forum. High Performance Fortran     Language Specification. Version 2.0. Jan. 31, 1997.     http://hpff.rice.edu/versions/hpf2/hpf-v20.pdf -   [33] Emre Ozer, Sanjeev Banerjia, Thomas M. Conte. Unified assign     and schedule: A new approach to scheduling for clustered register     file architectures. MICRO 1998, pp. 308-315 -   [34] Krishnan Kailas, Kemal Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu, Ashok Agrawala:     A New Code Generation Framework for Clustered ILP Processors. Proc.     Seventh International Symposium on High Performance Computer     Architecture (HPCA-7), pp. 133-143, Monterrey, Mexico, January 2001. -   [35] Wikipedia, Dominator article.     http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominator_(graph_theory) -   [36] Judea Pearl. Asymptotic properties of minimax trees and     game-searching procedures. Artificial Intelligence, 14 (2), pages     113-138, September 1980. -   [37] Bradley C. Kuszmaul, Synchronized MIMD computing, PhD thesis,     MIT, May 1994. -   [38] J. M. Borkenhagen, R. J. Eickemeyer, R. N. Kalla, and S. R.     Kunkel. 2000. A multithreaded PowerPC processor for commercial     servers. IBM J. Res. Dev. 44, 6 (November 2000), 885-898. -   [39] Supercomputing Technologies Group. Cilk 5.4.6 Reference Manual.     Supercomputing Technologies Group. MIT Laboratory for Computer     Science. Copyright 1998, MIT. http://supertech.lcs_mit.edu/cilk -   [40] G. M. Silberman and K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu, An     Architectural Framework for Supporting Heterogeneous Instruction-Set     Architectures. IEEE Computer, Vol. 26, No. 6, June 1993, pp. 39-56. -   [41] K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu and E. Altman. DAISY: Dynamic VLIW     Compilation for 100% Architectural Compatibility, Research Report     RC20538, IBM T.J. Watson Research Center, Yorktown Heights,     August 1996. 82 p.     http://global-supercomputing.com/people/kemal.ebcioglu/pdf/RC20538.pdf -   [42] K. Ebcio{hacek over (g)}lu and E. Altman. DAISY: Dynamic VLIW     Compilation for 100% Architectural Compatibility, pp. 26-37, Proc.     International Symposium on Computer Architecture (ISCA) 1997, ACM     press. -   [43] V. H. Allan, B. Su, P. Wijaya, and J. Wang, “Foresighted     Instruction Scheduling Under Timing Constraints”, IEEE Trans.     Computers, 1992, pp. 1169-1172. -   [44] A. D. Kshemkalyani, M. Singhal, Distributed Computing:     Principles, Algorithms, and Systems, ISBN: 9780521189842, paperback     edition, Cambridge University Press, March 2011. 756 pages. -   [45] Silicon Graphics Inc. Origin™ and Onyx2™ Theory of Operations     Manual. Document Number 007-3439-002. Copyright 1997 Silicon     Graphics Inc. 108 p.     http://www.futuretech.blinkenlights.nl/origin/007-3439-002.pdf -   [46] MESI Protocol. Article in Wikipedia.     http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/MESI_protocol

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates to the conversion of a single-threaded software program into an application-specific supercomputer.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION The Difficulty of Writing Parallel Programs

It is much more difficult to write parallel applications than sequential applications due to several reasons. First, identifying the available parallelism in an application requires a complete understanding of all possible interactions between the statements in the application and the semantic effects of executing these statements in parallel. Further, it is not sufficient to just identify the parts of the application that will execute in parallel, but there is also the problem of rewriting the application using parallel programming constructs. Even after a parallel version of the application is obtained, one needs to verify that this new version behaves identically to the sequential version. It is also a daunting task to verify that the generated parallel application has indeed exactly the same semantics as a sequential application. These difficulties in manual parallel programming, together with the advances in compiler technology, have led to the idea of automatic parallelization of sequential applications.

Definition of Automatic Parallelization

In automatic parallelization, a sequential program expressed using traditional sequential programming language constructs is automatically converted into its parallel equivalent by a tool called a parallelizing compiler. The process of automatic parallelization consists of a number of steps where the compiler performs various analyses and, using their results, optimizes/parallelizes the application. For instance, in order to execute parts of the application in parallel, the compiler should detect the code blocks that can be executed in parallel without violating the sequential semantics of the application. This information is obtained by performing an analysis called dependence analysis which identifies the data dependences between the statements in the application. The compiler can reorder two statements (or decide to execute them in parallel) only after verifying that two statements do not depend on each other.

Out-of-order superscalar processors [13] also perform automatic fine-grain parallelization of sequential software through hardware alone, by implementing a parallel form of a compiler algorithm in hardware, which runs continuously in real time and reorders independent instructions on the predicted path of execution, in order to achieve a shorter execution time within that predicted path.

Target System for Automatic Parallelization: General-Purpose Processors or Application-Specific Hardware

Compilers that perform automatic parallelization can also be classified with respect to the system that they are targeting: general-purpose or special-purpose systems.

Automatic Parallelization for General-Purpose Processors

Much historical research has been done on automatic parallelization of sequential code [20] [21] [22]. Although some scientific codes could be automatically parallelized, automatic parallelization techniques have been less successful on general non-numerical codes [24], resulting in very little parallelism. Some compilers today, such as gcc, open64, xlc, etc., target general-purpose processors and convert sequential applications into parallel applications. Traditionally, these compilers targeted distributed multiprocessor systems; however, with the introduction of shared memory multicore processors that provide multiple processing elements and shared on-chip resources (e.g., shared caches) on a single die, the idea of automatic parallelization for general-purpose processing is being revisited. The most important difference with the new multicore systems is that, the low access latency of on-chip caches that are shared by multiple cores introduces significant improvements in the memory behavior of the system.

Automatic Parallelization for Application-Specific Hardware

The process of application-specific hardware generation from a high level program specification is known as high-level synthesis. As a result of this process, the high level representation of the program, which is expressed using a high level programming language such as C or C++, is converted into hardware which is typically expressed in a hardware description language (HDL). Hence, the process is also called C-to-HDL synthesis.

In principle, creating application-specific hardware at the register transfer level should offer the most flexibility for automatic parallelization, since the sky is the limit with what can be done using specialized hardware design. In fact, specialized hardware circuits can overcome the difficulties that have impeded progress in automatic parallelization in the past, and can be the key to success in automatic parallelization. But, at present, automatic parallelization targeting application-specific hardware has had limited success and has not yet exploited its potential advantages, in the current generation of C-to-HDL tools [12] [19]. Some shortcomings of present-day C-to-HDL tools will be summarized in the paragraph below beginning with the words “Currently, there is no C-to-HDL synthesis tool that can . . . ”.

Difficulties of Automatic Parallelization

Although the idea of automatic parallelization is very simple and its advantages are clear, in reality, it is very difficult to implement effective parallelizing compilers. One important reason is that, dependence analysis of some programming language constructs is very difficult. For instance, programs that use indirect addressing, pointers, recursion, arbitrary control flow (unstructured conditional branches and loops) and indirect function calls extensively cannot be easily parallelized. Furthermore, it is also difficult to parallelize programs containing statements that access global resources, such as I/O, due to the difficulty of coordination for those resources.

Existing Tools/Approaches and Their Deficiencies

Since “supercomputer” is sometimes used as an imprecise marketing term, it is desirable to precisely define this term in the context it is used within the present specification. As used in the present specification and the appended claims, we define the term supercomputer to mean: a hardware system exhibiting substantial parallelism and comprising at least one chip, where the chips in the system are interconnected by a network and are placed in hierarchically organized enclosures.

-   -   A large hardware system filling a machine room, with several         racks, each containing several boards/rack modules, each         containing several chips, all interconnected by a scalable         network, is one particular example of a supercomputer. A single         rack of such a large hardware system is another example of a         supercomputer. A single chip exhibiting substantial parallelism         and containing several hardware components can equally be         considered to be a supercomputer, since as feature sizes         decrease in the future, the amount of hardware that can be         incorporated in a single chip will likely continue to increase.

We will summarize here the earlier efforts for automatic parallelization of sequential single-threaded software, using hardware, compilers or both. We can analyze this work along the following dimensions:

-   -   Productivity benefit: Using hardware and/or a compiler, is a         high level of abstraction (e.g., sequential program)         automatically being converted to a lower level parallel         representation (operations in the reservation stations of an         out-of-order execution engine, horizontal microcode, Register         Transfer Level hardware) while preserving sequential semantics?     -   Depth of parallelism: What is the depth of the parallelism? This         can be measured as the depth of the sub-thread tree, plus 1 to         account for instruction level parallelism. For example, a system         consisting of a set of parallel threads and their sub-threads         has depth 3.     -   Hedging the bets: Clearly a parallel execution system is faced         with a tree of possible outcomes of future unknown events: A         conditional branch is taken, or not; A load operand overlaps         with a prior store operand, or not; A logically later thread         reads memory locations written by a logically earlier thread, or         not. Rather than waiting to know the outcome, a parallel         execution system often predicts the outcome or speculates that         the outcome will have a certain value, using various techniques         including branch prediction, control speculation, data         speculation, and value prediction. The questions to ask include:         Is the predicted path through the tree of future possibilities a         linear path, or is it bushier (is the parallel engine hedging         its bet)?Are there global serialization points, where the world         stops, when a prediction turns out to be incorrect?     -   Implementation of unified global memory: How efficiently is the         single global memory requirement of the sequential program         implemented?     -   Systematic hardware duplication: Studying an instruction         execution trace reveals that the maximum parallelism in the         trace can be higher than the number of unique instructions in         the trace. Therefore an approach that allocates at most one         hardware functional unit per unique instruction will be unable         to reach the inherent available parallelism. Are hardware         resources being systematically duplicated to address this         resource bottleneck?

Currently, there is no C-to-HDL synthesis tool that can provide a comprehensive solution to the problem of converting a sequential program to an application-specific supercomputer. The analysis techniques employed in the state-of-the-art C-to-HDL synthesis tools provide very limited dependence analysis, support only a small subset of the input high-level language features, and can only be applied to programs written in a specific style. Typically, these tools can only convert small procedures into application-specific hardware. Furthermore, none of the existing tools can generate a supercomputer, i.e., do not use a method that can create parallel hardware systems scaling seamlessly from a single chip to a large system consisting of many racks. These tools are designed to generate hardware components, but not complete parallel systems. They cannot automatically generate hardware that will be distributed to multiple application-specific chips, can perform only limited memory optimizations, do not include any scalable network structures, and do not effectively utilize the potential synchronization capabilities of custom hardware. A survey of these tools is available in [12].

Prior studies on the theoretical limits of parallelism on a large sample of single-threaded sequential natured code including the SPECint benchmarks (e.g., [16][17]), have shown that:

-   -   (i) There is substantial potential parallelism in         single-threaded sequential-natured code;     -   (ii) The longer a trace of instructions to be parallelized, the         greater the potential parallelism within that trace.         Because of (ii), the number of instructions between global         serialization points (i.e., points where the world stops) in the         execution trace is a key factor in determining the success of a         parallelization technique.

A most commonly used parallelization technique is out-of-order execution of instruction primitives through hardware [13]. This is in fact done by a parallel scheduling algorithm implemented in hardware, which runs continuously, reordering operations on the predicted execution path in real-time, to reduce the total execution time of that predicted path. The out-of-order execution paradigm is widely adopted in today's processor design. In this paradigm, while fine-grain parallelism can be obtained within the execution trace in between branch mispredictions, branch mispredictions result in a global serialization of the parallel execution. In addition, a pipeline fill overhead is incurred during branch mispredictions, taking many cycles. Run time parallelization within a high frequency out-of-order processor requires a significant amount of power, since the processor is not only executing the operations; it is also dynamically scheduling/compiling them. Large look-ahead windows (essential for achieving high parallelism) are difficult to implement at high frequency. Also, multiple loads/stores per cycle are expensive in an out-of-order superscalar processor when the unified coherent memory model is implemented literally.

Horizontal microcode was an important invention by Maurice Wilkes [1], in effect creating a single finite state machine interpreter capable of realizing multiple finite state machines, depending on the microcode, and thus leading to hardware design productivity. The Very Long Instruction Word (VLIW) architecture proposed by Joseph A. Fisher [2] has exposed the horizontal microcode to a parallelizing compiler, thus achieving an important productivity benefit by automatically translating sequential code to the lower level horizontal microcode representation. However, Fisher's VLIW architecture and compiler created traces, or sequences of basic blocks which followed the predicted directions of conditional branches. The compiler could then schedule a trace as if it were a single big basic block, thus extracting more parallelism than the amount available in a single basic block. However, where traces were stitched together (at the entries or exits of traces), global serialization points would occur.

The hyperblock concept [4] (which influenced the Intel IA-64™ processor) converted the contents of certain if-then-else-endif statements to a particular dialect of predicated instructions (instructions executed only when a specified condition or flag register is true), therefore removing conditional branches from the instruction stream and creating longer branch-free blocks for fine-grain parallelization. However, this approach also incurred frequent global serialization when the remaining conditional branches after predication were mispredicted, when following a traditional processor pipeline design.

A general purpose parallelizing compiler should also be able to handle non-numerical codes with complex control flow (as opposed to only scientific applications). The Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling[11][10][9] (EPS) compiler scheduling technique, as well as the earlier Pipeline Scheduling [7][8] technique, provided the critical capability to software pipeline general loops with conditional jumps. Along with generalized multi-way branch support hardware for tree VLIWs with conditional execution [8], EPS avoided the branch misprediction penalty altogether within a given loop invocation, by speculatively executing operations on all paths. To conserve resources, EPS would also stop the execution of the remaining operations on a path as soon it was known that that path was not taken, and would identify each common operation occurring on multiple paths and execute it only once. However, EPS too caused global serialization at loop invocation boundaries, i.e., at the entry and exit points of both inner and outer loops.

The multiscalar architecture [6] divided the execution trace into a linear sequence of thread executions, where each thread was a program region, such as an inner or outer loop. The predicted next thread n+1 in the dynamic sequence of threads could start before thread n ended. Fine grain parallelism could also be extracted within a thread by a modified out-of-order processor. It was speculatively assumed that (i) thread n+1 was independent of thread n. (ii) the predicted next thread was indeed going to be the next one to be executed. If in fact the speculation was incorrect, a global serialization and recovery would occur.

The TRIPS architecture [14] is another important innovation, since it exposed the decoded instructions within the reservation stations of an out of order execution processor to the compiler, in a way analogous to how VLIW exposed horizontal microcode to the compiler. The TRIPS machine could execute a predicted sequence of hyperblocks just like the multiscalar architecture could execute a predicted sequence of threads in overlapped fashion. But when the prediction was incorrect, TRIPS too caused a global serialization, like the multiscalar architecture. Unlike the threads dispatched by a multiscalar processor, the TRIPS hyperblocks could not contain loops.

Mihai Budiu at al. described a method called spatial computation [5] to compile a sequential C program into asynchronous dataflow hardware units, creating about one functional unit per each operation in the original program. This method was used for reducing energy consumption. However this method also caused a global serialization at the entry and exits of each loop, due to the limitations of the particular data flow model that was used for loop representations, and due to the lack of systematic hardware duplication (necessary to extract high parallelism). This approach also implemented one global unified coherent memory literally, without partitioning.

The hierarchical task graph was described in [22], which was a compiler attempt to extract parallelism from an ordinary program within multiple hierarchical program regions. However, because this approach did not perform speculation (respected control dependences), did not spawn multiple parallel instances of program regions in a general way (necessary for high parallelism), used the cobegin-coend model of parallelism, did not extract fine grain parallelism, and used a small basic block as the minimum unit of thread-level parallelism (instead of a larger region such as a loop invocation), the maximum parallelism extracted by the hierarchical task graph on sequential-natured code was bounded. The cobegin coend (or parbegin-parend) model of parallelism [23] is a structured and elegant way to express parallelism explicitly by hand, but it in effect inserts an often unnecessary barrier synchronization among sub-statements at the end of the cobegin-coend, which causes a slowdown. The PTRAN compiler for automatic parallelization [25] also attempted to extract hierarchical parallelism from ordinary code, but suffered from the same problems. A number of independent but related efforts in the hardware research field [Edwards et al., U.S. Pat. No. 7,111,274] [Bennett, U.S. Pat. No. 7,315,991] also converted each level within the region hierarchy of a program into parallel hardware units, however, like the hierarchical task graph approach, they suffered from parallelism limitations.

The present document's method is different from the cited work, because of the following unique features:

-   -   Productivity benefit: Along with the current advances in the         compilation of high level programming languages to optimized         sequential code, and the current advances in the translation of         a Register Transfer Level hardware description to GDS II for an         ASIC chip design; the potential productivity benefit of         translating single-threaded sequential code to the Register         Transfer Level representation of an application-specific         supercomputer is high, since it can bridge the gap from software         to parallel hardware. The present document's method can generate         a customized, application-specific supercomputer, from arbitrary         sequential single-threaded code, at the Register Transfer Level.         The hardware system can be distributed across multiple chips.     -   Depth of parallelism: While most of the cited work is limited to         a parallelism nesting depth of about 2 (such as a sequence of         hyperblocks, where each hyperblock contains instruction level         parallelism), in the present document, program regions can         become parallel threads with arbitrary nesting (involving         sub-threads of sub-threads of . . . threads). Instead of using         the restrictive cobegin-coend model, in the present document's         method, parallel threads are spawned and are kept running for as         long as possible using a spawn-and-forget model, which is         unstructured as compared to cobegin coend, but which extracts         better parallelism.     -   Hedging the bets: While the cited work relies on a speculation         that a predicted sequence of instructions or instruction groups         will be executed, in the present document's method, there is no         linear predicted sequential order between threads. Program         regions at any level of the region hierarchy run independently         when their operands are ready, and handle their own internal         serializations within their hierarchical region, without         stopping the rest of the world. Branch misprediction penalties         are avoided, through speculation on all paths when dependences         and resources permit.     -   Implementation of global unified memory: The present document's         method partitions memory hierarchically, to enable high memory         parallelism, to avoid expensive coherence hardware and to enable         the generation of specialized memories, while remaining         semantically equivalent to the unified coherent memory model of         sequential code.     -   Systematic hardware duplication: The present document's method         contains a number of highly specialized hardware synchronization         units and a unique hierarchical software pipelining algorithm,         which systematically duplicates hardware as a way to address the         resource bottleneck mentioned above.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The invention comprises (i) a compilation method for automatically converting a single-threaded software program into an application-specific supercomputer, and (ii) the supercomputer system structure generated as a result of applying this method. The compilation method comprises:

-   -   a. Converting an arbitrary code fragment from the application         into customized hardware whose execution is functionally         equivalent to the software execution of the code fragment; and     -   b. Generating interfaces on the hardware and software parts of         the application, which:         -   i. Perform a software-to-hardware program state transfer at             the entries of the code fragment;         -   ii. Perform a hardware-to-software program state transfer at             the exits of the code fragment; and         -   iii. Maintain memory coherence between the software and             hardware memories.             The key phases of the method are summarized below:

Initial Phases and Hierarchical Software Pipelining

Starting from optimized sequential code produced by an ordinary optimizing compiler for a high level language program, a code fragment to convert to hardware is identified through a hardware-software partitioning algorithm. Then, hierarchical regions (such as loops, begin-end blocks) within the said code fragment are identified. Dependence analysis is done. Then hierarchical software pipelining is performed, enabling systematic duplication of hardware resources to achieve parallelism, as follows:

-   -   Each leaf region in the region hierarchy of the code fragment is         converted to a pipelined hardware finite state machine.     -   At least one copy of the finite state machine is created for the         said region, and a scalable network is added for communication         with the state machines, such that the combined finite state         machine copies and network behave as a single pipelined         primitive operation for performing the function of the region.     -   The previous two steps are recursively applied bottom-up to the         region hierarchy of the program, so that at each point where a         parent region invokes a child region in the software execution,         the finite state machine for the parent region initiates the         primitive pipelined operation for the child region in the         hardware execution.         The overall system is then created from the said finite state         machines, scalable networks, memory/cache structures, and unique         hardware synchronization units, which enforce the sequential         program semantics using parallel hardware.

Design Partitioning

If the resulting hardware design is large, it is divided into partitions such that each partition can fit into a single chip (or a single hardware module).

Chip Unioning

To reduce the non-recurring expenses for an ASIC implementation, such as mask expenses, a single union chip is created which can realize any of the partitions.

Runtime Memory Coherence

The system also includes a connection to a host processor. During the operation of this system, a runtime coherence protocol keeps the memory on the host machine and the memory on the generated application-specific hardware coherent.

This invention includes several compiler optimizations that existing approaches to automatic parallelization do not have. By targeting application-specific hardware, high efficiency and low overhead implementations of these optimizations and mechanisms are realized.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 Illustrates the supercomputer system hierarchy at the chip level.

FIG. 2 Illustrates the supercomputer system hierarchy at the rack module level.

FIG. 3 Illustrates the supercomputer system hierarchy at the rack level.

FIG. 4 Illustrates the supercomputer system hierarchy at the whole system level.

FIG. 5 Illustrates the components, networks and external communication devices within a chip. It also illustrates the master and slave ports.

FIG. 6 Illustrates a standard 8 input 8 output butterfly sub-network (PRIOR ART).

FIG. 7 Illustrates an example of an incomplete butterfly sub-network used by the invention.

FIG. 8 Illustrates a task sub-network organized as a 1-dimensional torus.

FIG. 9 Illustrates a task sub-network organized as a 2-dimensional torus.

FIG. 10 Illustrates the sending FIFO and receiving FIFO interfaces.

FIG. 11 Illustrates a building block of a quiescence detection circuit.

FIG. 12 Illustrates a quiescence detection circuit for an outer loop spawning multiple instances of an inner loop.

FIG. 13 Illustrates the request packet format of custom networks within the supercomputer.

FIG. 14 Illustrates the response packet format of custom networks within the supercomputer.

FIG. 15 Illustrates an example of the hierarchical software pipelining idea.

FIG. 16 Illustrates a memory hierarchy example with coherent private L1 caches.

FIG. 17 Illustrates a memory hierarchy example with no L1 caches and bank-interleaved L2 caches, suitable for applications with low locality of reference.

FIG. 18 Provides the RandomAccess C program, which is used as a running example.

FIG. 19 Illustrates a complete flat design for RandomAccess before partitioning.

FIG. 20 Describes the host-accelerator communication protocol.

FIG. 21 Provides the sequential intermediate code and C code for the RandomAccess inner loop.

FIG. 22 Shows the RandomAccess inner loop after Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling (EPS) stage 1.

FIG. 23 Shows the RandomAccess inner loop after Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling (EPS) stage 2.

FIG. 24 Shows the RandomAccess inner loop after Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling (EPS) stage 3 (last stage).

FIG. 25 Shows the RandomAccess inner loop final Tree VLIWs with conditional execution.

FIG. 26 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop, part 1 of 7 (I/O pins of module).

FIG. 27 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop, part 2 of 7 (register declarations).

FIG. 28 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop, part 3 of 7 (Finite State Machine).

FIG. 29 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop, part 4 of 7 (Finite State Machine, continued).

FIG. 30 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop, part 5 of 7 (Finite State Machine, continued).

FIG. 31 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop, part 6 of 7 (Finite State Machine, combinatorial FIFO handshaking outputs).

FIG. 32 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop, part 7 of 7 (quiescence detection circuit for the memory and parent loop networks).

FIG. 33 Illustrates the partition 0 of 2, within RandomAccess.

FIG. 34 Illustrates the partition 1 of 2 within RandomAccess.

FIG. 35 Illustrates the partition 2 of 2 within RandomAccess.

FIG. 36 Illustrates the results of chip unioning applied to the partitioned RandomAccess example.

FIG. 37 Provides the global component to local component map within the RandomAccess union chip.

FIG. 38 Provides the routing tables to be used within the RandomAccess union chip.

FIG. 39 Shows an example for register promotion based on write update cache coherence protocol.

FIG. 40 Shows a code example for hierarchical memory partitioning.

FIG. 41 Illustrates the memory address space hierarchy for the code example.

FIG. 42 Illustrates a memory node implementation with private coherent caches.

FIG. 43 Illustrates a memory node implementation with shared bank-interleaved caches.

FIG. 44 Illustrates a memory node implementation with shared bank-interleaved caches (data array external).

FIG. 45 Illustrates an implementation of the memory hierarchy example.

FIG. 46 Illustrates a train crash hazard prevention circuit, part 1 of 2.

FIG. 47 Illustrates a train crash hazard prevention circuit, part 2 of 2.

FIG. 48 Illustrates a serialization circuit, part 1 of 2.

FIG. 49 Illustrates a serialization circuit, part 2 of 2.

FIG. 50 Shows a program example using dynamic thread sequence numbers.

FIG. 51 Illustrates the hardware implementation of the program example using dynamic thread sequence numbers.

FIG. 52 Shows the Eratosthenes's sieve program.

FIG. 53 Illustrates the hardware implementation of Eratosthenes's sieve program.

FIG. 54 Shows the Bubble Sort Program.

FIG. 55 Illustrates the hardware implementation of Bubble sort with train crash synchronization only.

FIG. 56 Shows the Bubble sort algorithm, to be implemented with cascaded filters.

FIG. 57 Illustrates the implementation of Bubble sort with cascaded filters.

FIG. 58 Illustrates a resource sharing example, before merging the F and G functions.

FIG. 59 Illustrates the resource sharing example, after merging the F and G functions.

FIG. 60 Flat design for a compiler-friendly general purpose supercomputer.

FIG. 61 Union chip for the compiler-friendly general purpose supercomputer.

FIG. 62 Shows the program examples with recursive N-queens.

FIG. 63 Illustrates the hardware implementation of recursive N-queens.

FIG. 64 Recursive sequential algorithm for Alpha-Beta pruning

FIG. 65 Hardware implementation of Alpha-Beta pruning

FIG. 66 Illustrates the Steps of the Deep Profiler.

FIG. 67 Illustrates the partial inlining process for hardware software partitioning.

FIG. 68 Illustrates the hardware software partitioning algorithm.

FIG. 69 Illustrates the algorithm for symbolic execution.

FIG. 70 Illustrates a code example on which symbolic execution is done.

FIG. 71 Illustrates the dependence analysis algorithm.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

We are about to describe the details a method to automatically convert a single-threaded software program into an application-specific supercomputer, where the method comprises:

-   -   a. Converting an arbitrary code fragment from the application         into customized hardware whose execution is functionally         equivalent to the software execution of the code fragment; and     -   b. Generating interfaces on the hardware and software parts of         the application, which:         -   i. Perform a software-to-hardware program state transfer at             the entries of the code fragment;         -   ii. Perform a hardware-to-software program state transfer at             the exits of the code fragment; and         -   iii. Maintain memory coherence between the software and             hardware memories.             We will also describe the application-specific supercomputer             system produced by the method in detail. Since the field of             compiling arbitrary single-threaded software to an             application-specific supercomputer is new, we have provided             plenty of detail in the present document.

The preferred embodiment is organized in four major parts, as follows:

-   -   1. Structure of the customized supercomputer hardware: We         describe our baseline application-specific supercomputer         architecture at the structural level, including:         -   The entire supercomputer system,         -   19 inch racks,         -   19 inch boards/modules within the racks,         -   FPGA/ASIC chips on the modules,         -   The pinout and internal operation of each kind of hardware             unit within the chips,             -   Incomplete butterfly sub-networks             -   Task sub-networks             -   Quiescence detection circuits             -   Customized thread units             -   Data cache units and memory hierarchy             -   I/O controllers and the incomplete hypercube network for                 cross-chip communication,             -   PCI Express interface for host processor-accelerator                 communication.         -   The host processor communication interface.     -   We also describe the algorithm that, given a sequential         program's customized thread units as input, instantiate and         connect the components at the top level.     -   This completes the top level structural design of the customized         hardware hierarchy for a sequential program.     -   2. Compiling the sequential code into customized hardware thread         units: We then describe the algorithms to create the customized         pipelined thread units from a given program:         -   We give the fundamental correctness rules of parallelism,             i.e., program dependences within a sequential program which             a parallel hardware version of the same should satisfy.         -   We then describe hierarchical software pipelining, a             compilation technique to create an application-specific             supercomputer from a sequential program within the paradigm             described above, such that the parallel hardware execution             does satisfy all the program's dependences, and is a             functionally 100% compatible replacement for the software             execution of the same sequential program.         -   We describe the compiler techniques to obtain the customized             pipelined thread units of the supercomputer hardware at the             register transfer level, from hierarchical regions within an             arbitrary sequential software program.     -   Together with the top-level structural design algorithm above,         this completes the description of the baseline         application-specific supercomputer design and its compilation.         However, this design may be too large to fit on a single chip.     -   3. Partitioning large designs: To handle designs that do not fit         on a single chip, we describe techniques to:         -   partition a large design into multiple chips, and         -   finally create a “union” chip that can realize any one of             the partitions of the design, for achieving reduced             Non-Recurring Expenses, such as ASIC mask expenses, when             building the hardware.     -   This completes all the steps to convert a sequential program         into a baseline application specific supercomputer.     -   4. Optimizations: We then describe a number of optimizations and         additional applications of the baseline application-specific         supercomputing system and the associated compilation techniques.         Structure of the customized supercomputer hardware

Supercomputer System Architecture

As a result of applying the method in this document, a supercomputer system that is specifically configured according to the needs of the application is constructed. The supercomputer system hierarchy, from the leaves to the root, consists of:

-   -   i. Logic chips (FPGA or ASIC) and DRAM units (e.g., DRAM memory         chips following the DDRn standard, organized within Dual Inline         Memory Modules),     -   ii. 19″ rack modules,     -   iii. 19″ racks, and     -   iv. The complete supercomputing system.         We are describing here only the key hardware modules pertaining         to achieving high performance computation, and not the usual         known components that should be part of the system to make it         function, such as power supplies.

Referring to FIG. 1 , inside an FPGA or ASIC chip, the main computation is performed within finite state machines (101) called thread units. The task and synchronization networks (102) connect the finite state machines and are used to dispatch threads and execute operations in correct order. A multi-level partitioned on-chip cache hierarchy (103, 104) is accessed using memory networks (105, 106). The off-chip memory is accessed using memory controllers (107) and an off-chip memory network (108). The I/O controller (108) is used for cross-chip communication when the design does not fit in a single logic chip.

Referring to FIG. 2 , within a rack module, there are multiple FPGA or ASIC chips (201) that are connected to one or more DRAM units (202) which constitute the main accelerator memory. Each FPGA/ASIC chip is connected to its neighbor FPGA/ASIC chip using wide busses on the board, with differential high speed signaling (203). Each FPGA/ASIC chip is also connected to at least one high-speed serial communication cable.

Referring to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 , between the rack modules in a rack and across racks throughout the entire system, high-speed serial optical or copper cables (301, 401) are used to realize a scalable, possibly incomplete hypercube network¹. One of the FPGA/ASIC chips of the accelerator is connected to a host system through a PCI-Express connection (402). The host system comprises a host microprocessor (403) that the software part of the application runs on and a memory consisting of one or more host memory DRAM units (404) that is kept coherent with the memory on the accelerator. The host system can be a separate 19 inch module on one of the racks, or can be integrated with one of the supercomputer's 19 inch modules. l¹ While we will focus solely on incomplete hypercube networks in this document for simplicity of presentation, a single FPGA or ASIC chip may not have enough communication links to create a hypercube network for a large supercomputer. In this case the cube-connected cycles topology provides a solution. A small group of FPGA/ASIC chips on a rack module can act as a single hypercube node, such that the total number of external links of each group is increased, compared to a single chip. For example, assume the group contains chips A, B, C and D on a rack module with internal wide differential busses connecting A, B, C and D In a torus organization. Assume that there are 12 serial communication cables connecting a rack module to the outside world. Chip A on the rack module connects to serial communication cables 0, 1, 2; chip B connects to cables 3, 4, 5; chip C connects to 6, 7, 8; and chip D connects to 9, 10, 11. Then the entire group {A,B,C,D} constituting the rack module can form a hypercube node within a supercomputer system, with up to 2¹²=4096 rack modules (16384 FPGA/ASIC chips). For chip A to send a message out on link 4 of group {A,B,C,D}, the message has to be routed first to chip B with the on-board differential wide bus connection. A message arriving into the group {A,B,C,D} on link 4 (i.e., arriving at B) destined to chip A, also has to be routed first to the correct destination chip (A) internally within the group {A,B,C,D}. Parallel supercomputer systems of other sizes are of course possible as well.

The hypercube network is possibly incomplete, in the sense that the number of nodes can be any number, not necessarily a power of two.

The supercomputer generated by the present document's method acts as a coprocessor/accelerator attached to a host uniprocessor. The supercomputer is used to accelerate the execution of the sequential single-threaded application running at this host uniprocessor, by mapping one or more program fragments within the application to hardware, using a hardware-software partitioning algorithm, such as the one given in APPENDIX I. The supercomputer hardware is functionally 100% compatible with the software code fragments it replaces.

Components, Networks and Communication Devices within Each System Chip

Referring to FIG. 5 , each FPGA or ASIC chip within the system consists of hardware modules called components, networks, and external communication devices. These are the computational modules, in addition to the usual circuits that should be there to make the chip function, e.g., a Phase Locked Loop for driving the various clocks within the chip.

A component contains an arbitrary synchronous digital circuit possibly also including memories; and communicates with messages through its sending FIFO and receiving FIFO interfaces. Examples of components include:

-   -   A thread unit that is an optimized finite state machine for         executing a specific inner or outer loop, or begin-end block of         the program, by repeatedly doing the following:         -   Waiting for a new task request (loop invocation) to arrive             from its parent loop,         -   Working on the task (possibly sending memory load/store             requests to the data cache units or further task requests to             its inner loops, implemented in separate thread units), and         -   If a result (task response) is needed, sending back the             response of the task to the requester.     -   A pipelined data cache that accepts a new load or store request         (every cycle when dependences permit), performs the load or         store, handles line misses and line flushes as needed, and sends         back the load data, or the store acknowledgement as the         response.     -   A pipelined integer divide unit, which receives a dividend and         divisor every cycle and returns a quotient and remainder a fixed         number of cycles later.     -   An I/O controller for directing cross-chip message traffic.

A sub-network is a very simple high-frequency router for routing messages from one or more inputs (connected to sending FIFOs of some components) to one or more outputs (connected to receiving FIFOs of some components). Examples of sub-networks include: an incomplete butterfly sub-network made from primitive high frequency, 2 input 2 output core crossbar switches (where the message is sent to a specifically addressed output port of the sub-network), or a task sub-network (which sends an input message to any sub-network output port which is free to accept the message, i.e., whose receiving fifo is not full). Referring to FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 , for good load balancing, a task network can be implemented as a torus of one, two or more dimensions, so that tasks circulate in the network until they find a free thread unit. The building block of a task sub-network is the task crossbar switch, which efficiently connects the requesting inputs (the inputs whose FIFOs are not empty) to the available outputs (the outputs whose FIFOs are not full) in left-to-right order in one cycle.

The incomplete butterfly sub-network is incomplete in the sense that the number of inputs and outputs of the network do not need to be a power of 2: they can be any number. A standard 8 input 8 output butterfly sub-network is provided for reference to prior art in FIG. 6 . However, referring to FIG. 7 , a 5 input 3 output incomplete butterfly sub-network used by the present document, is obtained by deleting unneeded graph edges and graph nodes from the underlying, traditional 8 input, 8 output complete butterfly sub-network.

-   -   An incomplete butterfly sub-network design is described in         detail in APPENDIX A     -   A task sub-network design is described in detail in APPENDIX B.         A network is formed usually from two sub-networks, one for         sending requests in the forward direction, and the other for         receiving responses in the reverse direction.

An external communication device might consist of a PCI Express IP core, which is connected to the PCI Express lanes outside the chip. Or, it can be a high speed optical or copper serial communication IP core, implementing one end of a high-speed bidirectional serial communication link within an incomplete hypercube network. Or, it can be an IP core connected to a wide high bandwidth high-speed bus on the board, with differential signaling, connecting two neighboring FPGA/ASIC chips. Or, it might be a DDRn memory controller IP core connected to a neighboring dynamic memory unit. All communication devices have one sending FIFO and one receiving FIFO facing inside the chip. Parts of the external communication devices will likely be manufacturer-specific IP cores, while the components and networks are comprised only of technology-independent units designed at the Register Transfer Level, which are either created by the compiler from scratch, or instantiated by the compiler from a library of reusable/parametrizable Verilog modules designed by expert engineers (designed once, before the compiler is shipped; there is no manual hardware design work that is required of the user of the system). The RTL descriptions of components and networks are portable across manufacturer platforms to the extent possible.

A sending FIFO interface (i.e. collection of pins) of a component (or network) attaches point-to-point to a receiving FIFO interface of another network (or component). A component always goes through a network to communicate with another component. By virtue of this important property, it possible to partition any large design by spreading the many components connected to a given network over multiple chips, through I/O controllers (which are components for cross-chip communication).

The external communication devices, like components, also connect to a network on their signals facing inside the chip. Their signals facing outside the chip are used to perform an external communication function, for example, by connecting to the PCI Express lanes on the board.

As a special case, single input, single output networks, whose endpoint components are on the same chip, can be deleted (I.e., replaced by a wire connection), through the network elision optimization after the final partitioning and chip unioning phase, thus allowing the sending-FIFO wires of one component to directly connect to the receiving-FIFO wires of another component.

Let us give components, networks, and communication devices a common name, unit.

All components and networks run with the same system clock, and all units share a common reset signal. Thanks to internal FIFOs that use different clocks for their back and front sides, an IP core for an external communication device may run with a different clock rate than the rest of the system, when it has a different natural frequency, although its sending and receiving FIFO interfaces facing inside the chip will use the common system clock.

Referring to FIG. 10 , we specify here the FIFO interfaces for clarity. Here is the signal interface for a sending FIFO I/O pin set of a unit:

output_request: output, 1 bit //sending fifo of this unit not empty

output_acknowledge: input, 1 bit //receiving fifo of other unit not full

output_quiesced: optional input, 1 bit //spanning subtree rooted here has quiesced

output_payload: output, Nbits //the data to be transmitted to other unit

When output_request and output_acknowledge are both 1 in a given cycle, at the next rising clock edge, the output_payload is removed from the front of the sending fifo of this unit, and placed in the back of the connected unit's receiving fifo. Transfers occur on every rising clock edge while output_request and output_acknowledge both remain 1. When at least one of output_request and output_acknowledge is 0 in a given cycle, no transfer occurs at the next rising clock edge.

output_quiesced is an optional signal (present only on certain FIFO interfaces that are on a quiescence detection circuit), which indicates that the collection of units connected to this FIFO interface has no activity. Quiescence detection circuits are neither networks nor components; instead, they are small gate and flip-flop circuits that thread through the networks and components whose activity is being monitored, with connections in the form of a spanning tree². When the output_quiesced signal is 1 for a sufficient number of back-to-back cycles (where the number is precisely defined in APPENDIX C), it is inferred that the designated collection of units has quiesced, i.e., has ceased all activities. Quiescence detection will be explained further at around the paragraph below beginning with the words “Inner loops, which are executed for side effects . . . ”. APPENDIX C gives a detailed description of Quiescence Detection Circuits, including a technique to make the circuit cross chips. ² http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spanning_tree

Again referring to FIG. 10 , here is the signal interface for a receiving FIFO I/O pin set of a unit: The pins will attach point to point to the corresponding pins in another unit's sending FIFO interface.

input_request: input, 1 bit //sending fifo of other unit not empty

input_acknowledge: output, 1 bit //receiving fifo of this unit not full

input_quiesced: optional output, 1 bit // spanning sub-tree rooted here has quiesced

input_payload: input, Nbits //the data to be received

When input_request and input_acknowledge are both 1 in a given cycle, the input payload is removed from the front of the other unit's sending fifo and placed in the back of the this unit's receiving fifo at the next rising clock edge. Transfers occur on every rising clock edge while input_request and input_acknowledge both remain 1.When at least one of input_request and input_acknowledge is 0 in a given cycle, no transfer occurs on the next rising clock edge.

input_quiesced is an optional output signal (present only on certain FIFO interfaces that are on a quiescence detection circuit) indicates that the collection of units connected to this FIFO interface has ceased all activity. As in the description of output_quiesced, when this signal is 1 for a sufficient number of back to back cycles, it can be inferred that a designated collection of units has ceased all activity.

N, the number of payload bits, is the request payload size of a network, or the response payload size of a network. When the network uses multiple-word variable length messages, each N−1 bits long, the most significant bit of the payload (called the end-of-data or eod bit) is reserved to indicate the last packet of a variable length message. The end-of-data bit is 0 for all but the last word of a multi-word message; but in the final word, the end-of-data bit is 1. The payload bits will typically consist of opcode, address, and write data fields for a memory operation, or the data returned by a memory read operation, or the register inputs of a loop invocation, or the register results of a loop invocation.

A sending FIFO and a receiving FIFO of a component frequently work as a pair of FIFOs, called a slave port or a master port. A master port sends a request from the sending FIFO of its pair of FIFOs, and receives a response in the receiving FIFO of its pair. A slave port receives a request in the receiving FIFO of its pair of FIFOs, and sends back a response from the sending FIFO of its pair. A network with one or more master ports and one or more slave ports is implemented as a pair of sub-networks:

-   -   A forward sub-network that sends requests from a sending FIFO of         any master port, to the receiving FIFO of any slave port. This         sub-network is a task network when invoking a loop; otherwise,         it is an incomplete butterfly network.     -   A reverse sub-network that sends responses from the sending FIFO         of any slave port to the receiving FIFO of any master port. This         sub-network is an incomplete butterfly network.

For example, assume that a component A and a component B are connected to the same network Y. Assume that A (e.g., a customized thread unit for a loop L0) needs to send a request message (such as the register parameters of an inner loop invocation) to B (e.g., a thread unit for an inner loop L1 of L0) and will receive a response (the results of inner loop L1) from B, over network Y. Here is the sequence of events:

-   -   A master port of a component A on network Y, sends a request         from its sending FIFO     -   The request reaches the receiving FIFO of a slave port of B,         through the forward sub-network of Y.     -   B accepts the request and prepares the response for the given         request parameters     -   B sends the response from the sending FIFO of its slave port         back to the receiving FIFO of the master port of component A,         through the reverse sub-network of Y.

The bit widths of request and response payloads of a network may in general be different.

Request routing: log₂(number of slave ports) bits within the first word of the payload body (at a compile-time constant bit position, depending on the network) indicates the slave port number. For example, for a memory implemented with bank-interleaved caches, these are the bank selection bits within the address. Task requests do not need a destination slave port field, they can be sent to any slave port of a thread unit that is not busy (whose receiving FIFO is not full). When the network has only one slave port, the destination slave port number is also not needed.

When sending a multiword message, only the first word contains the slave port number, master port number and tag: the remaining words can be utilized by the payload as needed.

Response routing: The payload part of the request message includes two initial fields in its least significant part, in addition to the payload body: a master port number or requester id (identifying the number of the master port of the network who sent the request), and a tag, identifying which outstanding request this is, with a number. A tag allows multiple outstanding requests (requests for which a response has not been received) to co-exist in the system, e.g., by sending a first request with tag 0, then a second request with tag 1 from the sending FIFO of a master port, without waiting for the response for the first request to come back. A slave port, as it accepts an incoming request message, also remembers the master port number and tag, and adds these fields to the least significant bits of its response, when the response is ready. The master port number enables the response message to find its way back to the requester master port within the reverse incomplete butterfly sub-network. The tag of the incoming response will then be used in the requester component to identify which outstanding response this is. Responses can in general come back out of order (for example, in a bank-interleaved cache, when request 0 from a given master port misses in the cache using bank 0, and the following request 1 from the same master port hits in the cache using bank 3.).

By convention, the external communication devices such as the PCI Express, or DDRn controller, or chip-to-chip serial or parallel communication devices, are defined to have a slave port facing inside the chip.

Notice that a component may have more than one master port connection to the same network, when parallel access to the network is beneficial. The compiler or a library module design engineer creates Verilog code for the component to receive and send from internal master port numbers for the network (the pin names of the Verilog module). When an instance of the component is instantiated at the top level, the internal master port is connected to an actual network master port outside the component. For example, a thread unit component may have internal master ports 0,1 intended for connection to network n. Two copies of the thread unit may be instantiated at the top level, such that first thread unit's internal master ports 0,1 for network n are connected to master ports 0,1 of the actual network n, respectively, and the second thread unit's internal master ports 0,1 for network n, are connected to master ports 2,3 of the actual network n, respectively. Similarly, a component may have more than one slave port to the same network, identified within the component as internal slave port numbers for that network.

FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 illustrate the request packet format and the response packet format, respectively, in their most general form, of various customized networks within a chip of the supercomputer. Note that the customized networks in the application-specific supercomputer are different than existing general-purpose networks or on-chip networks: they are customized to realize one class of requests/responses only (e.g., load only, store only, integer divide/remainder only, L1 cache miss only). Because of their highly specialized nature and efficient hardware implementation, the present document's networks can be used for functions as critical as a load from a deeply pipelined L1 cache.

The possible custom optimizations on the network packet format include the following:

-   -   If the message is not of a multi-word format, the end-of-data         (Eod) bit is not used, and the message then consists of a single         payload word.     -   Sometimes communication between a master port of component A and         a slave port of component B do not need to be bidirectional. For         example, when an outer loop invokes an inner loop, but does not         need any register result from the inner loop, communication is         one-way (the outer loop at most needs to know if the inner loops         have quiesced). When communication is never bidirectional in a         given network, the master port number and tag are not needed for         that network.     -   Also, if there can only be one outstanding request, a tag is not         needed.     -   If no requests are speculatively issued (i.e., for all requests         that have a response, that response is explicitly received,         never discarded, as in the case of a speculative request on an         untaken path), and responses will come back in order, a tag is         not needed, even when communicating with a deeply pipelined         component.     -   When a network has only one master port, a master port number is         also not needed.     -   When a bit in the packet payload is always constant or dead, or         is always a redundant copy of another bit, it can be deleted         from the packet while sending the packet, and can be recreated         while receiving the packet. For example, a message of the form         (c1,c2,x,x,d,y), where c1,c2 are constant bits, d denotes a dead         bit not used by the receiving component, and x and y are         non-constant bits, can be sent over the custom network as (x,y)         without any loss of information, and can then become         (c1,c2,x,x,[not connected],y) when it arrives at the receiving         component. Based on very comprehensive profiling feedback         (described in more detail in APPENDIX H), the “constantness” or         redundancy of a bit can even be speculated, causing an error         when a bit assumed to be constant or redundant does not match         its expected value while being sent. The recovery from this rare         error can be accomplished by canceling the accelerator results         and reverting to software execution, as also described in         optimization 3 of the optimizations section.

Frequency considerations: Request, Acknowledge and Payload signals in these FIFO interfaces should reserve almost an entire cycle for wire delays, and their computation should include very little logic, to help achieve a good overall system frequency. There should be no round trip delays between different units; signals should travel at most from one unit to its connected neighboring unit.

FIFO interfaces have an excellent frequency remedy capability. If a sending FIFO interface of unit A is communicating with a receiving FIFO interface of unit B, and A and B should inevitably be placed far apart (communication between distant modules is inevitable in large butterfly networks, for example), a simple way to remedy the potential frequency decrease due to long wires, is to add one or more small two-element FIFOs on the long wire between A's sending FIFO interface and B's receiving FIFO interface, which does not change the semantics of the complete design (just increases the latency of some paths). Such an addition of an extra FIFO can be done after receiving feedback from a first compilation result, or can be done pre-emptively during a first compilation.

Further frequency considerations are discussed in optimization number 4 in the optimizations section.

Alternative Implementations

We will cite a few examples of alternative implementations in this section.

While the present preferred embodiment solves the problem of compiling single-threaded code to a parallel hardware system at a large scale, the method of the present document can also be applied to create a smaller parallel hardware system, such as:

-   -   An application-specific mini-supercomputer consisting of only         one rack, supporting the application needs of a department; or     -   A single low-frequency, low-power chip in a mobile device         exhibiting substantial parallelism, for improving battery life         on the applications being accelerated (making up for the lower         frequency with parallelism).

Although in this preferred embodiment, we focus on networks created from incomplete butterfly sub-networks and torus-shaped task sub-networks, and FIFO interfaces to attach components to networks, equivalent communication functionality (N to M forward routing and M to N reverse routing) between components on the same chip can be achieved by replacing each of our preferred networks with, for example, a customized high-speed serial or parallel on-chip bus (with its bus protocol replacing the FIFO interfaces), or a customized fat-tree network. The incomplete hypercube organization of the chip-to-chip network can also be replaced by an alternative network organization such as a fat-tree or a 3-D torus. Also, even though we focus on finite state machines for creating application-specific thread units with low energy consumption, the alternatives that can replace a finite state machine include a customized application-specific data flow circuit [5], or a general-purpose processor, containing only the needed features, wherein the thread-unit program is stored in a ROM in pre-decoded form. Of course, for each alternative, the low-level hardware details of components and networks are extremely important for achieving a high-performance application-specific supercomputer system with low energy consumption.

Introduction to the Thread Unit and Hierarchical Software Pipelining

Given an input program fragment (which we will call “the program” when there is no confusion) with arbitrary control flow, each loop in the nested loop hierarchy of the program (not including any inner loops of the given loop), as well as the outermost region of the program, is converted to a frequency-optimized finite state machine, namely, to a component called a thread unit. A thread unit communicates with the networks that connect it to the rest of the system with point-to-point sending and receiving FIFO connections. We will first describe what a thread unit does here, and later around the paragraph below beginning with the words “We have reduced the problem to scheduling/software pipelining just one loop . . . ”, we will show how to create a thread unit Verilog module from the sequential code for a program region. The thread unit implements a finite state machine that repeatedly does the following:

-   -   It waits for a loop invocation request to arrive from its parent         loop/region, to the receiving FIFO of its sole slave port (the         parameters of this request are the registers that are live at         the top of the loop and that are used inside the loop).     -   Then, it executes this loop invocation with the given parameters         in pipelined fashion, overlapping the loop iterations. It         executes operations on all paths speculatively, issuing         operations from iterations n+1, n+2, . . . before iteration n is         finished, whenever dependences and resources permit. However, to         save power, it stops execution of the remaining operations on a         path, as soon it is known that the path will not be taken. It         also recognizes identical operations common to multiple paths,         and executes them only once. It can support variable iteration         issue rates by dynamically taking extra cycles whenever a path         that has a longer dependence cycle is chosen in a given         iteration. The Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling algorithm [11][10]         is used to achieve these properties.     -   It finally sends back the loop invocation response, namely, the         register results (the registers that are set in the loop but         live at an exit point of the loop) to its parent loop/region,         through the sending FIFO of its slave port. If the loop is         executed for side effects (such as stores) only, no loop         invocation response is sent back.

Here is how the thread unit executes the operations in a program region

-   -   Operations that take one cycle or less: (e.g., add, shift,         logical operations) these are performed inside the loop thread         unit without interacting with any networks, as orchestrated by a         centrally clocked finite state machine, by allocating a         different custom functional unit for each distinct simple         operation. More than one dependent operation can be executed in         the same cycle, when all of them fit in the cycle, by making a         combinatorial chain of operations. For example,         -   shifting or rotating by a constant amount,         -   bit permutation,         -   logical operation (AND, OR) with a constant mask,         -   register copy operations,         -   storing a value in memory and subsequently loading it back             (using load-store telescoping [17] or register promotion             [15], this becomes equivalent to a register copy),         -   testing any bit in a register when the bit position is a             constant,             -   in particular, checking if a signed number is less than                 zero,         -   zero-extending or sign-extending a narrow variable to a             wider size,         -   and other similar simple operations     -   require no gate delays (just wire delays), and take nearly zero         time in hardware. Thus, several of these operations can be         packed in a single cycle. Also, a bitwise logical operation,         such as exclusive-or, requires only a part of a cycle and few         gates. Also, functional units with only the required operand         widths are created using a bit-width reduction optimization on         the initial sequential program. As a result, fine-grain         instruction level parallelism is increased, operation latency is         reduced, and power is reduced.     -   Multiple-cycle complex operations: A thread unit can perform the         following kinds of multiple-cycle operations:         -   a load, store or update operation on a port of the memory             hierarchy         -   a standard multi-cycle operation implemented through             instantiating a Verilog library module (such as an integer             division or a floating point operation)         -   an inner loop of the present loop, itself implemented as a             customized pipelined thread unit.

Each kind of complex operation has its own separate network. Connected to each such network, there are one or more master ports of requester thread unit(s), and one or more slave ports of responder components that implement this kind of operation. The number of master ports from a given requester thread unit for an operation kind is bounded above by the parallelism found by the compiler (for example, N simultaneous parallel loads to memory within a region, for a bank-interleaved memory hierarchy, will lead to at most N master ports from this thread unit which can send requests to any of the slave ports of the L1 cache banks).

To perform a multi-cycle complex operation of a given kind, the thread unit sends a request message to the dedicated network from a sending FIFO of a master port of the thread unit. If the operation requires a response, after waiting for at least a predicted number of cycles (where the prediction is based on profiler feedback or static knowledge), the thread unit attempts to receive the response in the receiving FIFO of the same master port. Requests can be pipelined: for example, requests n+1,n+2, . . . n+k−1 can be issued before the response to request n comes back.

Inner loops, which are executed for side effects (such as stores to memory) only, do not send back a response. However, the completion of all activity due to a request that started such a non-responding inner loop nest, can be monitored through a quiescence flip-flop that is associated with the master port for the request: The quiescence flip-flop is initially one. When any new request to invoke the loop nest is sent through the master port, the flip-flop associated with the master port is set to zero. When all activity (including the inner-inner . . . inner loops and the stores in them) due to past requests to a loop nest from the given master port are complete, as determined by a quiescence detection circuit, the quiescence flip-flop of the master port will become one again.

FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 illustrate a quiescence circuit for a loop nest consisting of an outer loop and k copies of an inner loop. The RandomAccess program depicted in FIG. 18 is one such loop nest. The outer loop spawns a new inner loop on each iteration (if the task network accepts it), and keeps going. The inner loop performs some stores that can be done in parallel. The objective of the circuit is to detect the completion of all activities within both the outer loop and all the inner loop copies. Referring to FIG. 11 , the Qunit circuit in each thread unit and task network are connected in the form of a spanning tree. When the output of a Qunit is 1 for a sufficient number of back to back cycles, it can be announced that the spanning sub-tree of thread units and task sub-networks rooted at this Qunit, has quiesced. Referring to FIG. 12 , the counter (1201) is initialized to −1 at system reset time. Each time a “still busy” signal comes from the quiescence detection circuit (formed from Qunits) of the loop nest, or when a new task is dispatched to the loop nest, the counter is set to a delay value equal to the maximum propagation delay of the spanning tree in cycles, plus a safety factor (further defined in APPENDIX C). When the counter is decremented back to −1, it means all thread units, stores, and task networks in the entire loop nest has quiesced. Thus, the sign bit of the counter value serves as the quiescence flip flop for the loop nest. Further details, including how to make quiescence detection circuits cross chips, are given in APPENDIX C. Notice that the detection of the quiescence of a large task sub-network may take many thousands of cycles in a large supercomputer implementation.

The quiescence of a store alone is easier to detect than a loop nest. An outstanding store counter is created for each memory master port, where the counter is initially −1. Each store request increments the counter. Each store acknowledge coming back from the memory hierarchy decrements the counter. It can be inferred that all past store requests have all completed when the counter is decremented back to −1. Thus, the sign bit of the outstanding store counter serves as the quiescence flip flop of a store master port. A store acknowledge is used only for the purpose of detecting the completion of stores.

Of course, a single thread unit for an inner loop is not enough to achieve the execution of multiple loop invocations in pipelined fashion, since the inner loop thread unit is likely to be busy with the pipelined execution of the iterations of one single inner loop. However, we would like to send new complete inner loop invocations back to back, as if the inner loop were a primitive pipelined operation unit, like a pipelined multiplier. This sort of pipelined execution of loop invocations is achieved by creating multiple copies of the inner loop and connecting them to a task network. Inner loops of inner loops are recursively duplicated. Referring to the example code and its hardware implementation in FIG. 15 , in an i,j,k loop nest, there might be 1 copy of the i loop, N copies of j loop, and M copies of k loop per j loop, leading to N*M copies of the k loop in the system. We call this technique hierarchical software pipelining. Thanks to the j loop thread unit array, the j loop looks like a primitive pipelined operation unit to the i loop. Similarly, the k loop looks like a primitive pipelined operation unit to each of the j loops. Referring to this example in FIG. 15 , we can now already state the basic hierarchical software pipelining technique for converting a single-threaded code fragment to a parallel hardware structure, which comprises the following steps:

-   -   Converting a leaf region in the region hierarchy of the code         fragment to a hardware finite state machine; and     -   Creating at least one copy of the finite state machine for the         said region, and adding a network for communication with the         state machines, such that the combined finite state machine         copies and network behave as a single pipelined primitive         operation for performing the function of the region.     -   Recursively applying the previous two steps to the region         hierarchy of the program, so that at each point where a parent         region invokes a child region in the software execution, the         finite state machine for the parent region initiates the         primitive pipelined operation for the child region in the         hardware execution.

In the context of the hierarchical software pipelining paradigm described above, the compiler additionally needs to estimate the following parameters to be able to create the hardware:

-   -   (i) The predicted latency in cycles for each inner loop (in case         a register result is returned by the inner loop);     -   (ii) The replication count of each loop;     -   (iii) The latency of memory load operations in cycles, depending         on the memory hierarchy organization; and     -   (iv) The latency and replication count of other complex         operations, such as dividers/multipliers.         These are estimated using profiling feedback and static         knowledge. The details of the estimation method for these         parameters are given in APPENDIX D.

Memory Hierarchy

The key requirements of the memory hierarchy of the customized supercomputer is that (i) it should, with the help of hardware synchronization units, support point-to-point synchronization between memory instructions issued from individual memory ports; and (ii) it should scale up to a large number of simultaneous load/store operations. If an instance of a memory instruction I₂ issued from port P2, depends on a logically earlier instance of memory instruction I₁ issued from port P1, there should be a means for that instance of I₁ to signal to a synchronization unit, indicating that I₁ is complete (so that I₂ will now never overtake I₁). This is accomplished by an acknowledge response for a store request. Note that a store instruction normally does not require a response in an ordinary memory hierarchy used in a general purpose microprocessor. By contrast, there is no requirement in the present memory hierarchy design for implementing multiprocessor instructions such as compare and swap or memory barrier, which do not arise in single-threaded software. To keep the baseline supercomputer simple, we will first describe the entire memory hierarchy as a single super-component which satisfies the synchronization requirements and implements a unified global memory with many ports that can be accessed in parallel, as a black box. The pin specification of the memory hierarchy box is:

-   -   One or more slave memory load/store ports connected to thread         units. Each memory load/store master port on each thread unit         connects, using a one-to-one network, with a corresponding         memory load/store slave port on the memory hierarchy. The thread         unit sends memory requests through these ports. Several         outstanding requests can be issued from each port, and the         responses for the requests can come back out of order, following         the network interface conventions of the present document. Like         the load request, the store request also receives a response, in         order for a synchronization unit to detect that the store is         complete.     -   One or more host master ports for sending requests such as line         read and line flush requests to the host computer, and getting         line data responses in the case of line reads. There are         connected to the host communication network. The PCI Express         external communication device is a slave port on the host         communication network, and is used to reach the host         application. The host application memory is the root of the         memory hierarchy.     -   One or more L2 data array master ports, connected with a one to         one network with the DDRn controller external communication         device. These issue read line and write line commands to the         external DRAM unit, which includes both the data and tag of each         L2 cache line.

Efficient implementation of the memory hierarchy is very important. The best, i.e., the most energy and performance efficient implementation choice is likely to be a customized, application-specific partitioned memory hierarchy, where there is no need for coherence between partitions, as described in optimization 1 in the optimizations section. For the baseline supercomputer, we will forego memory partitioning and describe the following two scalable baseline implementations of the memory hierarchy.

-   -   Coherent private L1 caches with a directory-based write-update         protocol. Perhaps an ideal cache is a write-update cache, where         a store to a shared line causes all shared copies of the line to         be updated. The write-update cache idea has not been popular in         scalable commercial systems in the past due to concerns about         excessive bandwidth requirements. In our directory-based         coherence protocol, the set of sharers of a line are known         exactly at all times, so write-update is easier to do, using         only limited network traffic. A directory unit is separate from         the corresponding L2 cache. The information kept in the         directory for a cache line (i.e., the set of caches that share a         line) is also cached inside the directory unit whenever there is         at least one cache that owns the line. In this manner accesses         to the L2 are avoided, whenever the line requested by one L1         cache is present in another L1 cache (note that the L2 cache is         much slower than the L1 cache since the L2 data and tag array         are in external DRAM in the present embodiment). Because the         compiler already places synchronization between dependent memory         operations, the parallel operation of the L1 caches and         directory units is greatly simplified in the present design:         there are no roll-backs or “NACK-negative acknowledge” responses         in our implementation. A directory-based write-update cache         coherence protocol is described in detail in APPENDIX E. FIG. 16         illustrates the structure of this cache.     -   A bank-interleaved shared cache is another possible memory         hierarchy design which leads to simpler logic. However, the         cache-hit memory latency is increased because of an additional         incomplete butterfly network, which gets inserted between the         thread units and L1 caches. The banks in bank-interleaved caches         reflect independent sections of an address space and hence do         not require coherence. However, minimum access latencies are         longer than that of coherent private caches, because of network         delays. A bank interleaved L2 cache with no L1 caches, suitable         for programs with no locality at all (like the RandomAccess         example), is illustrated in FIG. 17 . Bank interleaved memory is         straightforward to implement, and hence no appendix will be         provided to describe its details.         Communication Interface with Host Computer

The host interface consists of the PCI Express interface external communication device connected to the host computer. On the user logic side facing inside the chip, it contains a FIFO sending interface for messages coming from the host (through PCI express lanes external to the chip) and a FIFO receiving interface for messages going to the host (through PCI express lanes external to the chip). The messages are variable-length multi-word messages, where each word is 32 bits. The preferred embodiment uses a software based communication interface on the host, for maximum portability: a call to a subroutine start accelerator is placed just before the entry instruction of an accelerated code fragment within the original software application, which invokes the host-accelerator message exchange function described below.

The host-accelerator message exchange function communicates with the accelerator with the following C/C++ software API.

-   -   int send(const void* buf const int n);     -   Sends n bytes of the message at address buf and returns n, if         the sending was successful. Returns −1 on an error. The message         will appear in the PCI Express receiving FIFO of the         accelerator.     -   int receive(void* buf const int n);     -   Receives a message placed in the PCI Express sending FIFO of the         accelerator, of no more than n bytes into address buf and         returns the number of bytes received. Returns −1 on an error.

On the accelerator side, the PCI Express sending and receiving FIFOs constitute the sole slave port of the host communication network, already discussed in the memory hierarchy section. The master ports of this network are:

-   -   A top task adapter connected to the task network for the top         program region thread unit. Notice that by convention, the         accelerator is always the master when communicating with the         host. At the beginning of the application, we pretend that the         accelerator sent a resume request message to the host to start         the application, and the accelerator is now waiting for a resume         response message, to receive the new register state that the         accelerator should continue from. The top task adaptor receives         the initial register state with a resume response message from         the host and sends back the final register state in its resume         request message, in the format understood by the host messaging         software.     -   The host master ports of the bottom level (e.g., L2) caches in         the memory hierarchy, as discussed in the memory hierarchy         section. Line read or line flush requests from each bottom level         cache are sent to the host, and the line contents are received         back from the host, for the case of line reads.

Host-accelerator message exchange function: Here is how the host communicates with the accelerator. Assume that a particular program fragment within a sequential software application is chosen for acceleration and is converted to parallel hardware. We obtain a new program from the original application such that:

-   -   When the program arrives at the beginning of the chosen code         fragment, it invokes the start_accelerator subroutine, which         sends the initial register values, and program counter to the         hardware accelerator via a resume response message, and starts         waiting for response from the accelerator.     -   The accelerator runs, starting with empty caches.     -   When the accelerator is finished, it flushes all dirty entries         in its cache to the host application memory and invalidates its         caches.     -   The accelerator then sends the final register contents and the         final program counter to the host, with a resume request         message.     -   The host then restores these registers and jumps to the given         program counter, corresponding to the exit point of the chosen         code fragment.     -   The accelerated code fragment may be invoked zero or more times         during the execution of the software application.     -   When the host application is finished, the application sends a         terminate message to the accelerator in order to cause the         completion of accelerator activities.         -   For example, upon receiving the terminate message, the             accelerator lights up an LED indicating “done”. If a Verilog             simulation of the accelerator is being performed within a             second software process communicating with the process of             the application, the terminate message causes the Verilog             simulation process to also finish.

//communication between host and accelerator start accelerator: send RESUME_RESPONSE program counter,registers//send initial regs Message x; do {  receive x  switch(x) case READ_LINE, addr If the line can be accessed, send the line else send zeros break; case WRITE_LINE, addr,data, dirty bit mask write the specified dirty bytes of line data into addr send acknowledge break; case RESUME_REQUEST program counter,registers break;  } } while (x.opcode!=RESUME_REQUEST); Restore the registers in message x, and jump to the program counter given by message x.

FIG. 20 shows the host-accelerator communication protocol.

Alternative implementations: The following alternative implementations of the host-accelerator communication protocol are also possible:

-   -   Using a Direct Memory Access (DMA) hardware capability, a line         flush from the accelerator is written to the correct application         memory area under the correct byte mask, and a line read from         the accelerator reads from the correct application memory area,         without intermediate buffering or software intervention. Zeros         are returned when a location inaccessible to the application is         read by the accelerator.     -   A full symmetric coherence protocol (where the accelerator does         not flush its lines when it is finished, the host gets them back         on demand). This is most easily done by making the memory         hierarchy of the supercomputer (e.g., the one in APPENDIX E) the         system memory, and attaching the host microprocessor to the same         memory hierarchy, as if the host microprocessor were one of the         thread units. In this organization, the line read and line flush         messages from the accelerator are no longer required (the memory         coherence protocol replaces them).

Alternative ways to enter the accelerated code fragment, beyond the start accelerator software subroutine call, include:

-   -   1. A lightweight system call executing the host-accelerator         message exchange loop given above     -   2. A new hardware instruction start accelerator performing the         same message exchange loop in hardware.

The last two approaches should support external interrupts, to be detailed in the optimizations section, optimization number 12.

Supporting multiple different accelerator functions: In case multiple different program fragments extracted from disjoint regions of a software application are mapped to hardware, there will be one top level task adapter that will dispatch the initial task to the top level region thread unit for the requested program fragment. The bottom level caches may be shared among program fragments, or may be different for each program fragment. In any case, the requester id/master port number within each line read request indicates which cache should receive the line as a response. When sending the initial resume response message containing initial registers from the host to the accelerator, the resume response message also contains the correct program counter (entry point) address. A custom decoder within the top task unit sends the message to the correct top level region thread unit, based on the value of the entry point address.

Top Level Design Algorithm for Components and Networks

Now that we know how the top task adapter, the memory hierarchy, the PCI Express communication device, and the DDRn communication device(s) are to be connected together, we are ready to add the thread units and task networks to these, to complete the wiring of top level components.

FIG. 18 is an example program (a supercomputer application called RandomAccess). FIG. 19 shows the flat non-partitioned design for the RandomAccess program. A hierarchical software pipelining structure consisting of one copy of the top region, one copy of the i-loop and 8 copies of the j-loops constitute the thread units in this example. The host processor sends the initial register values over the PCI Express connection to the accelerator through the top task adapter, and receives the final register values also from the top task adapter. Each thread unit accessing memory is connected to separate ports in the multi-port memory hierarchy super-component. The external DRAM units (6 in this example) provide the lowest level cache for the system. When the DRAM cache units also cause a miss, the lines are obtained from the host processor through the PCI Express connection over the host communication network. When the accelerator is finished, it flushes its dirty lines also through the PCI Express connection to the software application address space.

Given the replication count for each loop, and the region hierarchy of the program, and total number of DDRn controllers, APPENDIX F describes the detailed algorithm for creating the top level components of the non-partitioned, flat supercomputer and connecting them, obtaining the result shown in FIG. 19 for the RandomAccess example.

This algorithm completes the top level flat design for a single chip. If this design fits on a chip, we are done. But if the design exceeds the area limits, it should now be partitioned, after exploding the memory hierarchy to its internal components and networks.

Compiling the Sequential Code into Customized Hardware Thread Units

In the previous sections we described how to create the flat, non-partitioned design for the complete application-specific supercomputer, assuming that the correct customized thread units were already available as components to instantiate. In this section we will describe how to create these customized thread units, given the input code fragment within the software application (we will again call this code fragment “the program” when there is no confusion) to be converted to hardware. For understanding thread units, understanding why and how the original program will work correctly on the parallel hardware is useful.

Correctness Rules of Parallelization

We should first define dependence:

An instruction is uniquely identified by its line number (or hexadecimal instruction address) within an object code/assembly listing of the program. An execution trace is the dynamic sequence of instructions executed by a program when started with a given memory and register state, until (if ever) the program ends. In general, the execution trace can be different for each different input register/memory state. Notice that a particular instruction I₁ may be executed multiple times, i.e., may occur multiple times in an execution trace. Each of these occurrences is called an instance of the instruction I₁.

An instance of a load/store instruction I₁ and an instance of a load/store instruction I₂ in the execution trace are said to have a memory dependence, if the said instances of I₁ and I₂ refer to the same data operand address, and at least one of I₁ or I₂ is a store.

An instance of instruction I₁ and an instance of instruction I₂ in the execution trace have a register dependence if the said instances of I₁ sets a register which is then used by the said instance of I₂. We can ignore the dependences where a register r1 is written by I₁ and written again by I₂, or read by I₁ and then written by I₂, since the register r1 written by I₂ can be renamed to e.g., r1′, and its uses can also be renamed to r1′, possibly with the introduction of a new copy r1=r1′, instruction, with known compiler techniques [10].

We say that an instance of instruction I₁ and an instance of instruction I₂ are dependent, if there is either a memory dependence, or a register dependence, or both, between these instances.

The parallel hardware version of a software program should give the same results as the original sequential software program, meaning that: given any initial state of memory and registers and program counter, it should produce the same final memory, registers and program counter as the (software) program. This means that, the hardware should meet the following correctness rules for parallelization. Namely, given an initial register/memory state and the corresponding execution trace, when the hardware is started in the same initial state:

-   -   1. The hardware should execute all instruction instances within         the execution trace.         -   a. Comment: Notice that some instructions (like add, shift)             take one cycle or less and are done inside a finite state             machine, while others (like divide, load) can take multiple             cycles and are done by sending messages to a library module             and receiving responses.         -   b. Comment: A compiler may first optimize the program to             obtain equivalent but faster sequential code for a hardware             implementation. For example, hardware has far more registers             and therefore register promotion [15] can be applied. Dead             or constant bits of results can be discovered by compiler             analysis and removed, leading to operations and registers             smaller than the full word length.     -   2. If the execution trace contains an instance of instruction I₁         and an instance of instruction I₂, where these instances of I₁         and I₂ are dependent, the parallel hardware version of the         program should also execute the said instance of I₂ after the         said instance of I₁.         -   a. Comment: In practice, here is how ordering of instruction             instances is achieved in a parallel hardware implementation.             If the instances of I₁ and I₂ are executed within the same             chip with a common clock, the instance of I₂ may begin in a             cycle following the cycle where the instance of I₁             completes. I₂ possibly uses the result of I₁, which is kept             in a register or memory location, or passed as part of a             message. Alternatively, I₂ could be executed in the same             cycle after I₁ as combinatorial circuits, if I₁ and I₂ are             very simple operations. If the instances of I₁ and I₂ are             executed in different chips A and B, the result of the             execution of I₁ contributes to a message sent from chip A to             chip B over a chip-to-chip interconnection, and I₂ in chip B             waits for that message before it can begin.     -   3. For instruction instances that are not dependent, the         hardware can execute them in any order, or in parallel, at the         same time.         The correctness rules should be satisfied for all execution         traces, i.e., for all program input states. The 3^(rd) rule         given above is where the parallelism comes from. Regarding the         critical 2^(nd) correctness rule given above, enforcing the         memory dependences is the most important issue, since the         compiler sometimes does not know (at compile time) if there is a         dependence between two given memory instructions, whereas for         register dependences, the dependence is completely clear to the         compiler.

Hardware synchronization units: For handling a dependence between two memory instructions (I₁,I₂), one of which is a store, the hardware version of the sequential single-threaded program incorporates at least one customized, application-specific hardware synchronization unit, which communicates directly or indirectly with the memory hierarchy ports for performing I₂ and also with the memory hierarchy ports for performing I₁ (note that in general multiple ports will be used since multiple instances of I₁ and I₂ may execute in parallel). The function of the hardware synchronization unit is specified below:

The function of the hardware synchronization unit is to ensure the following hardware execution order: If a memory instruction instance I₂ is dependent on a logically earlier memory instruction instance I₁ in the software execution, the said instance of I₂ is executed after the said instance of I₁ in the hardware execution. If I₁ is a store and I₂ is a load, the instance of I₁ can also forward its data directly to the instance of I₂ (where the instance of I₂ is accessing the same address as the instance of I₁) via the synchronization unit, without going through memory. Also, for the case where the compiler is not sure if a memory dependence, the synchronization unit may allow the instance of I₂ to execute speculatively before the instance of I₁ (with a wrong data speculation); in this case, the instance of I₂ should be re-executed by the synchronization unit after the instance of I₁ is executed, when the dependence is finally discovered, e.g., by comparing the operand address of I₂ and I₁ at run-time. We will describe several efficient implementations of customized, application-specific hardware synchronization units in the present preferred embodiment, namely:

-   -   The quiescence detection circuit in APPENDIX C and         optimization 6. Here, I₁ is in a program region (loop nest) A         and I₂ is in a program region (loop nest) B. The instance of B         waits for all memory instructions in the logically earlier         instances of A to complete, before it begins. Hence the instance         of I₂ in B will wait for the instance of I₁ in A to complete.     -   The serialization synchronization unit in optimization 2 within         the optimizations section. This is a more flexible variant of         the quiescence detection circuit.     -   The train crash synchronization unit in optimization 2. Here I₁         is in a region A where I₁ is executed repeatedly, and I₂ is in a         region B, where I₂ is executed repeatedly. I₂ in B continually         receives signals from logically earlier instances of I₁         indicating either “you are free to proceed” or “you are not free         to proceed” through the synchronization unit; thus, B can start         executing before A completes by monitoring the incremental         signals from A.     -   The FIFO synchronization unit in optimization 2. This is a         special case of the train crash synchronization circuit, where         the data is bypassed point-to-point from each member of a         sequence of instances of I₁ in region A to the corresponding         dependent member of a sequence of instances of I₂ in region B.     -   The compiled snoopy write-update cache synchronization circuit         in optimization 1. Here the instance of I₂ is synchronizes with         the instance of I₁ directly, without any intermediate circuits         as in quiescence detection, using highly customized logic. For         example, when load I₂'s data is already cached in a register,         store I₁ causes the cached register data for I₂ to be updated         without causing any memory access, when the dependence is         finally discovered.     -   The synchronization circuit supporting thread-level speculative         execution in optimization 3. Here I₁ is in a region A and I₂ is         in a region B. The synchronization circuit lets the instance of         B execute before the logically earlier instance of A containing         I₁ completes. It then re-executes B (and therefore I₂) when the         dependence is finally discovered.         Alternative embodiments of the customized hardware         synchronization unit not explicitly included in the present         document (for example, for supporting the parallel execution of         a first thread A writing a data structure in random order and a         second thread B reading the same data structure in sequential         order) are also possible.

Disregarding control dependence: Notice that we did not say that an operation that follows a conditional branch in the execution trace should be executed after the conditional branch. The dependence between a conditional branch that guards an operation (i.e., that determines whether to execute that operation or not), and the operation itself, is called control dependence [26]. When control dependence is ignored and an operation is executed before the conditional branch that guards it, the operation is said to be speculatively executed, as an instance of control speculation (distinct from data speculation). A speculatively executed operation may become a wasted computation, depending on the outcome of the conditional branch. Speculative execution is essential for achieving higher parallelism, as shown in the following example:

//example showing importance //of speculative execution int controlDep(int x,int n) { int z=1; for(int i=0;i<n;++i) { int y=f(x); if(y<0) { z=h1(z); } else { z=h2(z); } x=g(z); } return x; }

Here, if the control dependence from y<0 to z=h1(z) or z=h2(z) is respected, and x=g(z) therefore waits for y=f(x), y<0, and one of z=h1(z) or z=h2(z) to execute, almost no parallelism will be available during the execution of this loop, since there is a cycle of dependences: y=f(x)→if y<0→z=h1(z) or z=h2(z)→x=g(z)→back to y=f(x). But if the cycle is broken by not respecting the control dependence and cutting the edges emanating from y<0, by, for example, speculatively computing both h1(z) and h2(z) within iteration i immediately after the value of z is available from the previous iteration i−1, and later selecting the correct one when y<0 is finally computed in the current iteration i, more parallelism becomes available. If by the time iteration i wishes to compute the new value of z, y<0 is not yet computed even in iteration i−1 (hence the value of z from iteration i−1 is unknown, it is one of multiple possible values), computing the value of z in iteration i will require deeper speculation. If z′=h1(z) and z″h2(z) were the candidate values of z in iteration i−1, then h1(z′), h2(z′), h1(z″), h2(z′) can all be computed as the candidate values of z in iteration i, while the possible values of x in iteration i−1 can at the same time be speculatively computed as g(z′) and g(z″). While such aggressive all-paths speculation can explode into an exponential number of speculative computations, the total number of speculatively executed operations often does not exceed a practically feasible number, since whenever y<0 is finally known in a given iteration, half of all the speculatively computed values are discarded. If the operations f g, h1, h2 take only a single cycle, the speculation will be fine grain. If they are complex function calls or operations suitable for speculation, the speculation will be coarse grain—yet both fine grain and coarse grain speculative execution is important for getting speedup from highly sequential code fragments such as this one. For the case where f g, h1, h2 indeed take one cycle, the tree VLIW code [7] below demonstrates that it is possible to execute this loop with a state machine, at a rate of one cycle per iteration, with modest all-paths speculation. The point we wish to convey is that, in order to achieve higher parallelism, speculative execution is both essential and practical. Notice that a present-day superscalar processor execution of this code would suffer from a serialization overhead at each branch misprediction. All-paths speculation achieves better parallelism than branch prediction.

//Sequential code for speculation example loop: cc=(i<n); if (!cc) goto exit y=f(x); if(!(y<0)) goto L1 z=h1(z) goto L2 L1: z=h2(z); L2: x=g(z); i=i+1; goto loop exit: //x live here //Tree VLIWs with conditional execution //(state machine) for the speculation example. // //(1T) means operation belongs to iteration 1, //assuming: y<0 is true (T) in iteration 1. // //(2F-1T) means operation belongs to iteration 2, //assuming: y<0 is true (T) in iteration 1, and //y<0 is false (F) in iteration 2. loop: z1=h1(z); //(1T) z2=h2(z); //(1F) goto V1; V1: cc=(i<n); //(1) y=f(x); //(1) x1=g(z1); //(1T) x2=g(z2); //(1F) i=i+1;  //(1) z3=h1(z1); //(2T-1T) z4=h2(z1); //(2F-1T) z5=h1(z2); //(2T-1F) z6=h2(z2); //(2F-1F) goto V2; V2: //executed in one cycle/iteration if(!cc) { //(1) goto exit; } else { if(y<0) { //(1T) //Use only z1,x1 (1T), z3 (2T-1T), z4 (2F-1T) //Discard z2,x2 (1F), z5 (2T-1F) , z6 (2F-1F) x=x1; //(1T) cc=(i<n); //(2) y=f(x1); //(2-1T) x1=g(z3); //(2T-1T) x2=g(z4); //(2F-1T) i=i+1;   //(2) z5=h1(z4); //(3T-2F-1T) z6=h2(z4); //(3F-2F-1T) z4=h2(z3); //(3F-2T-1T) z3=h1(z3); //(3T-2T-1T) goto V2; } else { //(1F) //Use only z2,x2 (1F), z5 (2T-1F),z6 (2F-1F) //Discard z1,x1 (1T), z3 (2T-1T), z4 (2F-1T) x=x2; //(1F) cc=(i<n); //(2) y=f(x2) ; //(2-1F) x1=g(z5); //(2T-1F) x2=g(z6); //(2F-1F) i=i+1;   //(2) z3=h1(z5); //(3T-2T-1F) z4=h2(z5); //(3F-2T-1F) z5=h1(z6); //(3T-2F-1F) z6=h2(z6); //(3F-2F-1F) goto V2; } } exit: //x live here We will show below how tree VLIWs with conditional execution can be converted to state machines.

If a loop will iterate many times, and a control dependence is not on any dependence cycle of the loop, the control dependence can be respected without harming performance, by creating one or more

-   -   select z=cc,z′,z″         instructions, instead of the conditional branch using known         compiler techniques. The meaning of the select instruction         example given above is the C code equivalent z=(cc?z′:z″). This         transformation into select instructions is useful for the         purpose of reducing code explosion. A select instruction creates         a 2 to 1 multiplexer operation within a tree VLIW/state; it does         not increase the number of tree VLIWs/states like conditional         branches can.

To further demonstrate that the requirement for speculative execution applies not only to simple one-cycle operations but also to loads from memory, as well as to entire region invocations, we provide the Alpha-Beta pruning algorithm for chess playing in FIG. 64 , which has limited parallelism when speculation is not done: in this case, an entire recursive subroutine call must be speculatively executed to get high parallelism from this application. The details of Alpha-Beta pruning will be described in optimization 7 and 8 in the optimizations section.

Hierarchical Software Pipelining

Mealy finite state machines with a central clock, where each distinct operation is mapped to about one functional unit, are very attractive for creating application specific parallel hardware that is simple and that has minimal synchronization overhead. The operands of any given operation are ready in, e.g., flip-flops near the functional unit that will execute the operation, when the finite state machine arrives at the state and condition where the operation executes: there is no waiting for operands or synchronization overhead, beyond the finite state machine mechanism itself. The finite state machine approach has been chosen by the present preferred embodiment because of its simplicity.

A large program of arbitrary control complexity (e.g., a program with two or more loops, each of these loops having different conditional branches depending on the input data) can lead to too many states when its parallel execution is controlled by a single finite state machine. An entire program is too large, while a hierarchical region of the program such as a loop, with its inner loops/begin-end blocks converted to single complex instructions, is often of an acceptable size for conversion to a finite state machine for parallel execution. On the other hand, making a state machine cover a region smaller than a loop invocation, such as a small basic block, would lead to little instruction level parallelism within the region, and would increase communication and synchronization across dependent regions. With small regions, cross region communication (through memory or registers/task networks) can unnecessarily waste energy and possibly lengthen the global critical path. For this reason, our preferred approach has been to construct finite state machines for hierarchical program regions with substantially long execution traces where no global serialization point occurs, with each inner region (inner loop or begin-end block) collapsed into a single complex instruction. Instruction level parallelism in an outer loop, whose instructions are complex instructions each containing instruction level parallelism, and the recursive nesting of complex instructions (hierarchical software pipelining), can lead to a multiplicative effect on the total instruction primitives per cycle. Hence the higher the (possibly complex) instruction level parallelism at each loop level, the higher the potential multiplicative effect on instruction level parallelism, due to the recursive nesting. To help avoid creating state machines for program regions with little instruction level parallelism, inner loops that are typically executed very few times as determined by profiling feedback, can be peeled a few times with loop peeling [29], thus becoming integrated with the outer loop, when the number of iterations in the inner loop are indeed few.

The sequential semantics of a complex instruction representing an inner loop or begin-end block (as opposed to an atomic instruction representing a primitive operation such as an add or a store) is that, the complex instruction reads and writes all the registers and memory locations that would have been read or written by the original program region, when started in the same initial state. Executing the complex instruction is equivalent to executing the corresponding original program region in the same starting state. Both the program region and the corresponding complex instruction achieve the same functional transformation on the given input (state of memory and registers).

Given an initial state before a region starts execution, we define a hierarchical execution trace for that region and input to consist of a sequence of pairs:

(I,T)

-   -   Where I is an atomic or complex instruction immediately within         the region, and T is either a hierarchical execution sub-trace         corresponding to I, if I is a complex instruction, or is NULL,         if I is an atomic instruction.

The sequence of the hierarchical execution trace is the sequence of atomic and complex instructions executed by the region given the particular input. Flattening a hierarchical execution trace will yield a standard (non-hierarchical) atomic instruction trace for a region and input.

A region can be parallelized at its hierarchical level by a scheduling and software pipelining algorithm, considering both atomic and complex instructions as if they were ordinary pipelined operations. But any parallelization should obey the following rule.

We state the hierarchical software pipelining correctness rule:

-   -   For any hierarchical execution trace of a program region with a         given input, where inner program regions have been collapsed         into complex instructions, if two atomic or complex instructions         in the hierarchical execution trace are dependent, they cannot         be reordered during the parallel hardware execution of this         program region with the same input.

This rule ensures that all of the dependences in any original execution trace of the program region are respected, since if instances of two atomic instructions that might be deeply nested within instances of complex ones are dependent during an execution, the complex instructions should also be dependent, and will not be reordered as a consequence of the rule, and therefore the original instances of the atomic instructions will not be reordered. Therefore the key correctness rule 2 within the section above entitled “Correctness Rules of Parallelization” will be satisfied. Independent instances of atomic or complex instructions within a hierarchical loop execution trace can be arbitrarily reordered, or executed in parallel, to extract better parallelism. A good way to achieve this is to create multiple copies of custom functional units (finite state machines) to execute a complex instruction, and connect these copies to a network, such that the final result is a primitive pipelined operation (similar to a pipelined multiply or divide operation) implementing the inner loop/complex instruction, as already dictated by the hierarchical software pipelining principles.

Thus, all that a scheduling/software pipelining algorithm for constructing a finite state machine should do, is to follow the hierarchical software pipelining correctness rule, and not reorder (possibly complex) instructions that are dependent.

Scheduling and Software Pipelining Algorithm

We have reduced the problem to scheduling/software pipelining just one loop of the program, whose inner loops have all been collapsed into a complex pipelined operation (behaving in a way similar to a pipelined multiply or divide operation), following the hierarchical software pipelining principles stated above. This one loop needs to be software pipelined and then converted to a frequency optimized finite state machine, which will become the thread unit for the loop (A Verilog or other HDL module at the register transfer level).

The method of the present document will work on any single-threaded sequential program, including unoptimized programs, but starting with a program optimized with state-of-the-art compiler techniques will improve the quality of the results. In this preferred embodiment, we begin with a highly optimized sequential program.

Starting with the sequential code for a loop, we should obtain a finite state machine in a hardware description language such as Verilog. This is achieved by:

-   -   Converting all loads/stores, nontrivial arithmetic operations         (divide, etc.) and inner loop invocations to send and receive         operations;     -   Representing all the required dependences in the hierarchical         sequential program possibly containing complex instructions,         according to hierarchical software pipelining correctness rule,         by introducing dummy dependence registers, and quiescence         flip-flops, as needed;     -   Creating the software pipelined version of the sequential code;         and     -   Creating the finite state machine from the software pipelined         code and outputting the thread unit at the Register Transfer         Level in a hardware description language such as Verilog,         including the FIFO I/O pin interfaces.

A dummy register is a register which is used to create a dependence (that does not otherwise exist) between a send or receive operation O1 and a send or receive operation O2. O1 is made to set the dummy register and O2 is made to use the same dummy register, forcing the scheduler to schedule O2 in a cycle after the cycle where O1 is scheduled. However, since the contents of the dummy register is not used, the width of the dummy register is zero: a dummy register does not generate any hardware register. If the program takes a path where O1 is never executed, O2 can be executed without waiting for O1, as if the dummy register had a valid initial value.

In prior sections around the paragraph above beginning with the words “Inner loops, which are executed for side effects . . . ”, we described the hardware implementation of a quiescence flip flop. Here we describe how a quiescence flip-flop behaves as seen by a compiler/scheduler algorithm. Like a dummy register, a quiescence flip flop also forces an ordering between a send operation O1 that sets the flip flop, and another send operation O2 which uses the flip-flop. However, unlike a dummy register, a quiescence flip flop imposes a (generally unpredictable) latency for O1:O2 cannot begin until O1's latency has elapsed. A quiescence flip flop is initially 1. When used as a destination of a send instruction, the flip flop is first immediately set to 0, and then it becomes 1 by itself after all activities (including inner loops, inner inner loops, stores, updates, . . . ) started by all prior instances of this send instruction have completed. A second instruction that uses this quiescence flip flop will wait until the quiescence flip flop is one, before proceeding. In the case where there were no prior invocations of the first instruction, the second instruction can also proceed immediately, since the quiescence flip flop of the first instruction is already 1.

Each load operation to memory in the sequential code (such as the load_short_unsigned instruction below) will be converted to a send of the load request and address from a master port of the memory, followed by a receive of the load response from the same master port, with k (the predicted minimum delay amount for this load) single cycle delay operations in between, as shown below:

load_short_unsigned rt=MEM,ra => send t1=MEM,OP_load_short_unsigned,ra,d0,q0 delay t1=t1 //t1=tag identifies outstanding request delay t1=t1 delay t1=t1 receive rt=MEM,t1,0,32 //load data starts at bit 0 of payload //load data width=32 bits receive d1=MEM,t1,32,0 //dummy reg, width=0 bits (no HW)

The send operation sends the address register ra to the network of the memory MEM, while creating a new tag for the request, which is returned in t1. While waiting for the result of the load, the tag is copied from register to register (possibly the same register, t1) with delay operations, whose sole purpose is to enforce a wait time of at least k cycles between the send and the receive. The optional dummy input register d0 used by the send may be set by a previously executed dependent (atomic or complex) memory operation, and is used to ensure that the send occurs after the dependent operation. The optional quiescence flip-flop q0, is set by a previously executed dependent atomic or complex memory operation (such as a store, or an inner loop executed for side effects only). The send stalls until all activities started by prior instructions setting q0 have completed (i.e., until q0 is 1).

As described above, the final zero-width dummy result register d1 can be used to ensure dependent (atomic or complex) memory operations are not started before the load completes.

A store instruction (such as the store_byte instruction below) is converted to a send of the store request including the memory name MEM, opcode, address and data (without a corresponding receive). It sets a quiescence flip-flop, for example, q1. Any operation that depends on this store, should wait for the quiescence flip-flop q1 to become 1. In case nothing depends on the store within this loop, q1 is not needed. The optional dummy input register for the send, d0, may be set by a prior dependent memory load operation or prior dependent inner loop that returns a register result. The send will wait until the prior load instruction or inner loop instruction is complete. The optional quiescence flip-flop input, q0, for the send, is set by a prior store or prior inner loop that does not return a register result. The present send will wait until all activities initiated by the prior store instruction or non-returning inner loop instruction are complete. Note that there may be zero or more input dummy registers and input quiescence flip-flops in a send, based on the number of prior instructions that this send depends on.

store_byte MEM,rAddr,rData => send q1=MEM,OP_store_byte,rAddr,rData,d0,q0

An invocation of an inner loop (such as the for loop shown below) of the current loop which returns register results is converted to: a send of the loop parameters (the registers that are live at the top of the loop and used inside the loop) to the loop task sub-network, followed by k single cycle delay operations, followed by a receive of the inner loop results (the registers that are live at some loop exit, and set inside the loop) from the reverse task sub-network. Note that an inner loop can exit from different exit points, conditionally. For an inner loop with more than one exit point, to enable the containing loop to figure out how the inner loop exited, the values of all but one of the loop exit condition registers should also be received from the inner loop and checked.

//struct Node {Node* link; int data;}; //for(Node* r1=linked_list_addr;r1!=NULL;r1=r1−>link) { // if (r1−>data==r3) {found: ...; break;} //} notfound: ... copy r1=linked_list_addr; loop: //r1=linked list, r3=key to search compare_eq cc1=r1,NULL if (cc1) goto notfound load r2=data(r1) compare_eq cc2=r3,r2 if (cc2) goto found load r1=link(r1) goto loop notfound: ... found: ...use r1 => copy t1=linked_list_addr send t1=LOOP2345,r1,r3,d0,q0 delay t1=t1 ... delay t1=t1 receive r1=LOOP2345,t1,0,32 //bits 31:0 of payload receive cc1=LOOP2345,t1,32,1//bit 32 of payload receive d1=LOOP2345,t1,33,0//dummy reg, no HW if (!cc1) goto found //how did the inner loop exit? notfound: ... found: ...use r1

A loop, which is executed for side effects (such as stores or updates) only, does not return any registers. In this case a send operation that sets a quiescence flip-flop, without a corresponding receive, is sufficient, as shown below:

//for(i=0;i<n;++i) X[i]=y; copy i=0 loop: compare_lt cc1=i,n if (!cc1) goto exit shift_left t2=i,2 add rAddr=X, t2 store MEMX,rAddr,y add i=i,1 goto loop exit: next instruction => send q1=LOOP3456,n,y,d0,q0 exit: next instruction

Again, if no other operation within this loop is dependent on the inner loop, the quiescence flip-flop is not needed.

Any complex, multiple cycle operation (integer divide, floating point) is changed to a send of a request to the dedicated network for the operation of the given kind, followed by k delay operations, followed by a receive of the result(s) of the operation. No dummy registers or quiescence flip-flops are needed, since a purely arithmetic operation such as division does not set or use any memory. This is illustrated for the divide_unsigned instruction below.

divide_unsigned rt=r1,r2 => send t1=DIV4567,OP_divide_unsigned,r1,r2,d0,q0 delay t1=t1 ... delay t1=t1 receive rt=DIV4567,t1,0,32 //start position=0, width=32 //quotient is received, remainder is discarded

Given a pair of memory instructions (I₁,I₂), where each among I₁ and I₂ is either located in the present loop or is nested inside any of the present loop's inner loops, and where at least one of I₁ and I₂ is a store, the dependence analysis algorithm should answer the question: is there an instance of I₁ and an instance of I₂ in the execution trace of any invocation of the present loop, such that the said instance of I₂ refers to the same address as the said instance of I₁? If the dependence analysis algorithm's answer is a maybe (meaning it does not know the answer) or yes, it should be conservatively inferred that the pair of instructions (I₁,I₂) are dependent within the present loop. To get this answer using a dependence analysis technique based on symbolic execution (as described in APPENDIX J), which creates symbolic expressions in the simplest form for the address of each load/store, and uses a symbolic subtraction and other tests to check dependence, we should restrict the dependence check for (I₁, I₂), between I₁ with current loop index j and I₂ with current loop index j′, to only the following cases:

-   -   I₂ follows I₁ in the loop body in reverse post order, and j′>=j;         or     -   I₂ precedes I₁ in the loop body in reverse post order, and j′>j.         The indices of the loops enclosing the current loop are kept the         same in the symbolic address expressions of both I₁ and I₂ while         any indices of inner loops of the current loop are replaced by         different variables in the symbolic address expressions of I₁         and I₂.

Given two memory instructions I₁ and I₂ anywhere within the present loop or its inner loops, such that (I₁, I₂) are dependent within the present loop according to the compiler dependence analysis above, here is how the dependence is enforced:

-   -   If I₁ is in an inner loop A that does not return a register         result and I₂ is in an inner loop B         -   the send operation for the inner loop A containing I₁ sets             quiescence register q1 and the send operation for the inner             loop B containing I₂ uses q₁. B is not issued until all             previously initiated executions of the first loop A have             completed, i.e., until q1 becomes 1.     -   If I₁ is in an inner loop A that does not return a register         result and I₂ is a load or store immediately within the loop         -   the send operation for the inner loop A containing I₁ sets             quiescence register q1 and the send operation for the load             or store operation I₂ uses q1. I₂ is therefore not issued             until the first loop A has quiesced. I₂ will wait for all             previously initiated executions of A to end.     -   If I₁ is in an inner loop A that returns a register result, and         I₂ is in an inner loop B         -   The receive operation for the register results of the inner             loop A containing I₁ sets dummy register d1, and the send             operation for inner loop B uses d1, ensuring proper             ordering. Note that as the inner loop A returns a register,             all memory operations within it (including I₁) should have             already completed.     -   If/I₁ is in an inner loop A that returns a register result, and         I₂ is a load or store immediately within the loop         -   The receive operation for the register results of the inner             loop containing I₁ sets dummy register d1, and the send             operation for I₂ uses d1, ensuring proper ordering. Note             that as the inner loop A returns a register, all memory             operations within it (including I₁) should have already             completed.     -   If I₁ is a store immediately within the loop and I₂ is in an         inner loop B         -   The send operation for I₁ sets quiescence flip-flop q1 and             the send operation for the inner loop B containing I₂ uses             q1, to wait for all prior instances of I₁ to quiesce.     -   If I₁ is a store immediately within the loop and I₂ is a load or         store immediately within the loop,         -   The send operation for I₁ sets quiescence flip-flop q1, and             the send operation for I₂ uses q1 to wait for all prior             instances of the store I₁ to quiesce.     -   If I₁ is a load immediately within the loop and I₂ is in an         inner loop B         -   The receive operation for I₁ sets dummy register d1, and the             send operation for the inner loop B containing I₂ uses d1.             At the time B starts, I₁ has already ended.     -   If I₁ is a load immediately within the loop and I₂ is a store         immediately within the loop,         -   The receive operation for I₁ sets dummy register d1 and the             send operation for I₂ uses d1. At the time, I₂ starts, I₁             has already ended.

Quiescence dependences implied by transitive closure can be ignored. For example, if (I₁, I₂) have a quiescence dependence, and (I₂, I₃) have a quiescence dependence, and I₃ is executed if and only if I₂ is executed, and I₂ is executed if and only if I₁ is executed, then any quiescence dependence edge (I₁, I₃) can be ignored. This is because, whenever I₃ is executed, I₂ has already been executed, which in turn means that I₁ has also already been executed. This optimization can reduce hardware by removing unneeded quiescence dependences (lead to an AND gate with smaller fan-in, see the mainLoop example below).

Notice that by examining every dependent pair of memory instructions in the current loop, the above rules can be used to add the quiescence flip-flops, and the zero-width dummy registers to the results and source operands of atomic and complex instructions in the sequential code for a loop, making it ready for the scheduling/software pipelining algorithm.

Finally, the following modifications are made to the beginning and end of the sequential code for the loop:

-   -   Code is added to the beginning of the loop, to receive the next         loop invocation request from the parent loop/region.     -   If the loop does return a register result (nonzero-width         registers set in the loop are live at the loop exit):         -   Code is added at the exit of the loop, to send the register             results of the loop in a response message to the parent             loop. This message will wait for all inner loops and stores             within the current loop to quiesce before it is sent.     -   The receiving of the next loop invocation parameters cannot be         overlapped with any activity in the current loop invocation         (otherwise deadlock could occur, if the current loop waits for         the outer loop to send the next invocation parameters, and the         outer loop waits to receive the results of the current loop         invocation). This dependence can be ensured with a dummy         zero-width register, which is set by the final send of the loop         invocation results and which is used by the initial receive of         the loop invocation parameters.

This completes the algorithm for the construction of sequential code, which is now ready for scheduling.

To make dependences between complex instructions/inner loops more clear, here is an example demonstrating the operation of quiescence detection circuits and quiescence flip-flops for enforcing dependences between inner loops of a loop:

int X[N][N]; int sum[N}; int mainLoop(int n) { for (i=0;i<n;++i) { if (tst1(i)) { unsigned r=i+1; for(int j1=0;j1<n;++j1) { r=nextRandom(r); sum[i]+=X[r%N][r%N]; } } if (tst2(i)) { for(int j2=0;j2<n;++j2) { X[i][j2]=f(i,j2); } } } return 0; } //sequential code for mainLoop start: receive n=P,0,32,d0 //receive n copy i=0 loop: cc0=i<n if(!cc0) goto exit cc1=tst1(i); if(!cc1) goto L1 //j1 loop waits for j2 loop send q1=LOOPj1,i,q2 L1: cc2= tst2(i); if(!cc2) goto L2 //j2 loop waits for j1 loop send q2=LOOPj2,i,q1 L2: add i=i,1 goto loop exit: //mainLoop waits for all to quiesce send d0=P,0,q1,q2 goto start //go pick up new input

-   -   Here, each instance of the j loop depends on all the logically         earlier instances of the j2 loop, since the j1 loop can read any         location in the X matrix, and logically earlier executions of         the j2 loop write the X matrix. Also, each instance of the j2         loop depends on all logically earlier instances of the j1 loop,         since the old values in X should first be read by the j1 loop,         before the j2 loop stores new values in the X matrix (possibly         to the same locations that have been read by the j1 loop). The         j1 loops of different iterations of the i loop are not dependent         on each other, since they only read the X matrix. The j2 loops         of different iterations of the i loop are not dependent on each         other, since they write different parts of the X matrix.         Therefore, the sending of the j1 loop request is gated on the         quiescence flip-flop q2 of the j2 loop, and the sending of the         j2 loop request is gated on the quiescence flip-flop q1 of the         j1 loop. There are no other memory dependences in the i loop.     -   If during the parallel execution of loop i, an earlier instance         of the j2 loop was started and is not yet finished, and the         current iteration of the i loop executes the j1 loop (tst1(i) is         true). The sending of the request for the j1 loop invocation         will wait until all prior invocations of the j2 loop have         quiesced, to ensure that they have written the new values into         matrix X.     -   Similarly, if a j2 loop is being invoked when a logically         earlier instance of the j1 loop has been started but is not yet         finished, the j2 loop will wait until all the logically earlier         invocations of the j1 loop have quiesced, to ensure that these         j1 loops have read the old values in the X matrix.     -   If, in a sequence of the i loop iterations, only the j1 loop is         invoked, the j1 loop invocations can be issued up to once every         cycle, in deeply pipelined fashion, as if the j1 loop thread         unit array were a pipelined functional unit. Similarly, in a         sequence of i loop iterations where only the j2 loop is invoked,         the j2 loop invocations can be issued up to once every cycle, in         deeply pipelined fashion, as if the j2 loop thread unit array         were a pipelined functional unit.

We will now describe the scheduling and software pipelining algorithm. Any general-purpose software pipelining algorithm can be used with the present document. In this preferred embodiment we use the Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling (EPS) technique [10] as the main scheduling technique, since it is resource constrained, it handles arbitrary conditional branches and conditional exits within a loop, and also implements speculative execution of operations on all paths and can thus be resilient to branch mispredictions. We will provide a summary of the EPS algorithm here, using a step-by-step example. An advantage of EPS is that its result, consisting of tree VLIW instructions with conditional execution, can be easily converted to a Verilog finite state machine, as follows:

-   -   After sends and receives have been introduced and quiescence and         dummy dependence registers have been added, run the complete EPS         algorithm (including register allocations, peephole compaction)         on the sequential loop program;     -   Starting from the final tree VLIWs with conditional execution         produced by EPS, create an FSM state for each VLIW tree         instruction;     -   Translate the tree VLIW instruction program to a Verilog module,         using the following key translation algorithms:         -   Each path through the tree VLIW represents a mutually             exclusive combination of condition code registers. For             example:

//Example of a Tree VLIW //with conditional execution L0: if(cc1) { r1=f(r2); if (cc2) { r3=g(r3); goto L1;//cc1&cc2 } else { r4=h(r5); goto L2; //cc1&!cc2 } } else { goto L3; //!cc1 }

-   -   -   Each leaf of the tree VLIW (labeled L0 in the example)             represents (i) a combination of condition registers, (ii) a             set of operations to execute when these conditions are true,             and (iii) a next VLIW label to jump to. The conditions are             mutually exclusive. This is illustrated in the following             table for the example tree VLIW labeled L0:

Operations Next Conditions to execute VLIW cc1 = T & cc2 = T r1 <= f(r2), r3 <= g(r3) L1 cc1 = T & cc2 = F r1 <= f(r2), r4 <= h(r5) L2 cc1 = F & None L3 cc2 = ? (Don’t care)

-   -   -   This tree VLIW is then translated to a Verilog casez             statement each of whose internal cases corresponds to a leaf             of the tree VLIW. When the Boolean combination conditions             specific to a tree leaf is true, the corresponding set of             operations are executed, and the next state is set to the             FSM state corresponding to the VLIW label this leaf branches             to. Since the conditions for each leaf of the tree VLIW are             mutually exclusive, the synthesis annotation “full case             parallel case” can be safely added (meaning: the conditions             of the cases are mutually exclusive and the cases cover all             possibilities), which can result in a more optimized state             machine to be synthesized from a Register Transfer Level             Verilog specification. The following Verilog code             illustrates the translation of a tree VLIW program including             L0:

  reg [LOG2NSTATES−1: 0] state; localparam S_start=0, ..., S_L0=2, S_L1=3, ...; always @ (posedge clock) begin  if(reset) begin   state <=S_start;//initial state  end else  case(state) //for each VLIW instruction   //synthesis full case parallel case   ...   S_L0: casez ( {cc1,cc2} )    //synthesis full case parallel case    2‘b11: begin     r1 <= f(r2);     r3 <= g(r3);     state <= S_L1;    end    2'b10: begin     r1 <= f (r2) ;     r4 <= h(r5);     state <= S_L2;    end    2‘b0?: begin     state <= S_L3;    end   endcase //S_L0: casez ( {cc1,cc2} )   ...  endcase // case (state) end // always @ (posedge clock)

-   -   -   A general purpose tree VLIW machine supporting conditional             execution [8] is a finite state machine interpreter that can             interpret any tree VLIW program, executing each FSM state             transition in one cycle. But by translating the tree VLIW             program directly to a hardware finite state machine as in             the present document, we can avoid the interpretation             overhead, potentially resulting in significant power savings             and performance advantages in comparison to the             general-purpose tree VLIW machine.         -   Here is how send and receive operations are implemented             within the finite state machine: The output signal             output_request for a given sending FIFO interface is             asserted (set to 1), and the output_payload output bus is             set to the correct value, only when in the state and             condition when a send should be executed. Once in a state             and condition where a send is executed, the finite state             machine does not proceed to the next state until the             output_acknowledge input is also asserted. The             input_acknowledge output is asserted only when in a state             and condition where a receive from this network should be             executed. The finite state machine does not proceed to the             next state until the input_request input is also asserted,             at which time the datum is received from the network.

The following small example is taken from FIG. 6(c), p. 863, of the Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling paper [10]. We will show how to convert this example into a Verilog module.

  //sequential code from Fig 6, p. 863 in EPS paper //r0 live here loop: r0=f (r0); cc0=r0<C; if(cc0) goto loop exit: //r0 live here

In EPS, the code to be scheduled is made acyclic, by always using a fence that cuts a set of edges the loop's current control flow graph. The initial fence is placed at the start of the loop body. At each stage of EPS, empty tree VLIWs are created at the edges cut by the fence, and ready operations on a path reachable from the empty VLIW and that does not cross the fence, is moved to the empty VLIWs. The graph is incrementally modified while making the code motion; for example, registers may be renamed, and copies of an operation may be made on edges joining the path of code motion. Each incremental step is a correct transformation: the semantics of the program is not changed. Once all the empty VLIWs of the fence are filled with once cycle's worth of operations and conditional branches, the fence is moved to the outgoing edges of the newly created VLIWs, and the next EPS stage begins. The EPS stages continue until all operations from iteration 1 have been scheduled in some VLIW. Arbitrary conditional branches and loop exits in the input code can be handled by EPS.

The sequential code obtained after adding send/receive operations is given below.

  //after adding send/receive ops: //receive inputs for next task from parent loop start: receive r0=P, 0, 32, d0 //original loop loop: r0=f (r0) ; cc0=r0<C; if(cc0) goto loop exit://r0 live //send task response to parent loop send d0=P, r0 goto start

We will explain below the step-by-step EPS scheduling [10] for this loop. Starting from the main loop part of this code, rewritten as tree VLIWs containing one operation each, the fence is initially placed at the beginning of the loop body, as shown below. The tree VLIWs with conditional execution used during the EPS stages have sequential semantics: they can also be correctly executed by an ordinary RISC microprocessor. However each group of operations placed by EPS within a tree VLIW can be executed all in parallel. In EPS stage 1, loop iteration 1, cycle 1 is scheduled. The only operation that can be scheduled in this cycle is r0 f(r0), which immediately follows the fence:

  //before EPS stage 1 loop: { //==fence==  goto loop_: } loop_: {  r0=f (r0);  goto L1; } L1: {  cc0=r0<C;  goto L2; } L2 : if (cc0) {  goto loop; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live //EPS stage 1-a, //moving r0=f (r0) of it 1 loop: { //==fence==  r0=(r0);  goto L1; } L1: {  cc0=r0<C;  goto L2; } L2: if (cc0) {  goto loop; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live

In the second stage of EPS, the fence is moved down to the outgoing edge of the first fence's VLIW, and cycle 2 of iteration 1 is scheduled, together with cycle 1 of iteration 2 (the VLIW labeled loop) which is now reachable without crossing the fence. First the cc0=r0<C condition computation which is already next to the fence is moved to the fence. The if (cc0) operation of iteration 1 cannot be moved to the fence, because it is not ready yet. But the already-scheduled cycle 1 of iteration 2, containing the r0 f(r0) computation can be moved to the fence. However, since the old value of r0 is still live if iteration 1 exits, it would be incorrect to move r0 f(r0) to the fence as it is, as such a move would overwrite r0, causing the exit to see a wrong value of r0. A new register r1 should be used as the destination register off(r0). This is done by changing

-   -   r0=f(r0);     -   to the equivalent sequence     -   r1=f(r0);     -   r0=r1;         and then moving r1=f(r0) to the fence VLIW. As the operation is         being moved past the join point of the loop entry, a copy of the         operation r1=f(r0) is created at the loop entry edge. Here, the         r1=f(r0) operation is a speculative operation belonging to         iteration 2, which is executed within iteration 1, before it is         known if iteration 2 will be executed or not: if iteration 1         exits (the speculation is incorrect) this computation will be         wasted. Notice that, as a result of the present incremental         transformation, we have created an extra operation r0=r1, which         has been left in the original location of r0=f(r0). But this         extra copy operation is harmless in the sense that it never         inhibits parallelism, it is transparent: an operation following         r0=r1 and using r0 can always move through r0=r1, by renaming         the uses of r0 to r1 within the operation.

  //EPS stage 2 starting loop: {  r0=f (r0);  goto L1; } L1: { //==fence==  goto L1_; } L1_: {  cc0=r0<C;  goto L2; } L2:  if (cc0) {  goto loop; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live //EPS stage 2-a, //moving cc0=r0<C from it 1 loop: {   r0=f (r0);  goto L1; } L1: { //==fence==  cc0=r0<C;   goto L2; } L2: if(cc0) {  goto loop; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live //EPS stage 2-b-1, //moving r0=f(r0) from it 2 loop: {  r1=f (r0) ;  r0=r1;  goto L1; } L1: { //==fence==  cc0=r0<C;  goto L2; } L2: if(cc0) {  goto loop; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live //EPS stage 2-b-2, //moving r0=f(r0) from it 2 loop: {   r1=f (r0) ;  goto loop_; } loop_: {  r0=r1;  goto L1; } L1: {  //==fence==  cc0=r0<C;  r1=f (r0) ;  goto L2; } L2: if(cc0) {  goto loop_; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live

In EPS stage 3, the fence is moved down again to the outgoing edges of the VLIW of the last fence, and then, cycle 3 of iteration 1, as well as the operations from cycle 2 of iteration 2 (VLIW labeled loop), and cycle 1 of iteration 3 (VLIW labeled L1), which are now reachable without crossing the fence, are scheduled together. The if cc0 operation of iteration 1 is finally ready, and is moved to the fence. Then, r1=r0 from iteration 2 is moved to the fence. Finally, cc0=r0<C and r1=f(r0) from iteration 3, are moved to the fence. The steady state software pipelining kernel has been created in the tree VLIW L2. Since no more iteration 1 operations remain to be scheduled, the EPS stages have finished.

  //EPS stage 3 starting loop: {  r1=f (r0);  goto loop_; } loop: {  r0=r1;  goto L1; } L1: {  cc0=r0<C;  r1=f(r0);  goto L2; } L2: {  //==fence==  goto L2_; } L2_: if(cc0) {  goto loop_; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live //EPS stage 3-a, //moving if (cc0) from it 1 loop: {  r1=f(r0);  goto loop_; } loop_: {  r0=r1;  goto L1; } L1: {  cc0=r0<C;  r1=f(r0);  goto L2; } L2: { //==fence== if(cc0) {  goto loop_; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live //EPS stage 3-b, //moving r0=r1 from it 2 loop: {  r1=f(r0);  goto loop_; } loop_: {  r0=r1;  goto L1; } L1: {  cc0=r0<C;  r1=f (r0);  goto L2; } L2: { //==fence== if(cc0) {  r0=r1  goto L1; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live //EPS stage 3-c,3-d, //moving cc0=r0<C, //r1=f(r0) from it 3 // (EPS finished) loop: {  r1=f(r0);  goto loop ; } loop_: {  r0=r1;  goto L1; } L1: {  cc0=r0<C;  r1=f(r0);  goto L2; } L2: { //==fence== if(cc0) {  r0=r1;  cc0=r0<C;  r1=f(r0);  goto L2; } else {  goto exit; } exit://r0 live

The final tree VLIWs with conditional execution are then obtained from the result of EPS, by:

-   -   Changing from sequential to parallel VLIW semantics, where each         operation in a VLIW uses a register available in the beginning         of the VLIW instruction         -   For example: r0=r1;r1=f(r0) in the same VLIW is changed to             r0=r1; r1=f(r1); also, r1=f(r0); r0=r1; is changed to             r1=f(r0); r0 f(r0);     -   Repeatedly merging independent VLIWs that are adjacent in the         VLIW control flow graph, until no more merging can be done. This         is called peephole compaction.     -   Performing dead code elimination and register allocation.         The final result, including the receiving and sending of the         loop invocation parameters, is shown below.

  //final tree VLIWs //with conditional execution //after EPS //(parallel semantics) start: {  receive r0=P, 0, 32, d0  goto loop; } loop: {  r0=f(r0);  goto L1; } L1: {  cc0=r0<C;  r1=f(r0);  goto L2; } L2: if(cc0) {  copy r0=r1;  cc0=r1<C;  r1=f(r1);  goto L2; } else {  send d0=P, r0  goto start; }

The paper [10] contains further details of EPS. Using the final tree VLIWs with conditional execution, we can now emit the Verilog module:

  // ' define f (x) ... // ' define C ... module loop1 (  input reset  ,input clock  //″reg″ outputs are really combinatorial  //receiving FIFO of slave port of parent loop (P) network  ,input P_input_request  ,output reg P_input_acknowledge  ,input[31:0] P_input_payload  //sending FIFO of slave port of P network  ,output reg P_output_request  ,input P_output_acknowledge  ,output reg[31:0] P_output_payload ) ;   //declare registers occurring in the tree VLIW program   reg cc0;   reg[31:0] r0,r1; //main finite state machine, one state per tree VLIW reg[1:0] state; localparam S_start=0, S_loop=1, S_L1=2, S_L2=3; always @(posedge clock) begin   if (reset) begin    state <=S_start;   end else    case (state) //synthesis full case parallel case     S_start: casez(P_input_request)     1'b1: begin      //receive r0=P, 0, 32, d0      r0 <= P_input payload[31:0];      state <= S_loop;     end     default: begin //wait for next input     end    endcase    S_loop: begin     r0 <= 'f(r0);     state <= S_L1;    end    S_L1: begin     cc0 <=(r0 < C) ;     r1 <= 'f(r0);     state <= S_L2;    end    //S_L2:    default: casez({cc0, P_output acknowledge})     //synthesis full case parallel case     2'b1?: begin      r0 <= r1;      cc0 <= (r1 < ′ C) ;      r1 <= 'f(r1);      //state <= S_L2;     end     2'b01: begin      //send d0=P, r0      state <= S_start;     end     default: begin //wait for network     end    endcase   endcase  end //always  always @(*) begin //combinatorial outputs   case(state) //synthesis full case parallel case    S start: begin     //receive r0=P, 0, 32, d0     P_input_acknowledge=1;     P_output_request=0;     P_output_payload=r0;    end    S_L2: casez(cc0)     1'b1: begin     P_input acknowledge=0;     P_output request=0;     P_output payload=r0;    end    1'b0: begin     //send d0=P, r0     P_input_acknowledge=0;     P_output_request=1;     P_output_payload=r0;    end   endcase  default: begin //default outputs     P_input_acknowledge=0;     P_output_request=0;     P_output_payload=r0;    end   endcase  end //always @(*) begin //combinatorial outputs endmodule //loop1

Any synthesis technique can be used to create hardware from the Verilog code obtained from EPS. But in order to clearly state our method to create hardware from sequential single-threaded code, independently of any particular synthesis platform, we describe here the preferred hardware synthesis technique for Verilog code obtained from EPS:

-   -   For each unique expression (r1 op r2) on right hand sides of         assignments in the Verilog program, where r1 and r2 are         registers, only one functional unit (performing the function op,         with inputs tied directly to r1 and r2) is created. More than         one occurrence of (r1 op r2) in a right-hand side in the Verilog         program will lead to only one hardware functional unit         performing (r1 op r2).     -   States are implemented with one-hot encoding, with one flip flop         allocated to each state. Boolean condition registers will be         available in the beginning of the cycle, in such a way that         state transition signals, clock enable signals, and multiplexer         select signals will likely be available early in the cycle.     -   Each register is formed from one or more flip-flops, which are         not inside any register file. Each register's clock-enable         signal is the logical OR of all (state,condition) pairs where         that register is assigned with a non-blocking assignment in the         Verilog code. When there is more than one expression assigned to         a register r1, an input multiplexer is created before the         register, whose selection signal for each distinct expression e,         is the logical OR of the (state,condition) pairs where e is         assigned to r1. The (state,condition) pairs where the         clock-enable signal for r1 is false, are don't care conditions,         which should be used for logic optimizations of these         multiplexer selection signals.     -   Combinatorial one bit output signals (such as output_request in         a sending FIFO or input_acknowledge in a receiving FIFO) are         obtained as the logical OR of (state,condition) pairs where the         said output signal is a 1.     -   A combinatorial output_payload bus, when it can be set to more         than one possible expression in the Verilog program, is obtained         using a multiplexer whose inputs are the distinct expressions,         and whose select signal for each expression e, is derived from         the logical OR of (state, condition) pairs where that expression         e is assigned to the said output_payload bus. The         (state,condition) pairs where the corresponding output_request         signal is false, are don't case conditions, which should be used         for logic optimization of the multiplexer select signal.         Optimization 4 in the optimizations section describes frequency         optimization techniques within the synthesis paradigm described         above.

The following improvements can be made to original Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling algorithm, to improve the generated hardware:

-   -   The original EPS cannot execute dependent operations (e.g., xor         r1=r0,r3 followed by and r2r1,N) in the same tree VLIW. As an         improvement, multiple dependent operations that do not exceed a         cycle (one cycle can approximately hold the latency of a 32 bit         add and a simple multiplexer) can be placed in the same tree         VLIW. This technique is known, and has for example been called         combining or chaining.     -   The original EPS is greedy: it will schedule an operation as         soon as possible if resources are available. To reduce register         pressure, achieve lower cycles/iteration and improve scheduling         with finite resources, scheduling of certain operations can be         made non-greedy, in a way analogous to prior work in modulo         scheduling [27]. I.e., even if such an operation is ready to         schedule in a given cycle, its scheduling can be deferred to a         future cycle.

As a more complex example, in FIG. 21 to FIG. 32 we provide the transformation of the inner loop of the RandomAccess program to a Verilog module.

-   -   FIG. 21 Provides the sequential intermediate code and C code for         the RandomAccess inner loop, after the update instruction has         been converted to a send. The loop invocation inputs of the j         loop are received from the outer (i) loop with a receive         instruction. The fence (which makes the code temporarily         acyclic) is at the top of the loop body, ready for EPS algorithm         to start.     -   FIG. 22 Shows the RandomAccess inner loop after Enhanced         Pipeline Scheduling (EPS) stage 1. The fence is at the         instruction with label L1.     -   FIG. 23 Shows the RandomAccess inner loop after Enhanced         Pipeline Scheduling (EPS) stage 2. The fence has moved down to         the instruction with label L2.     -   FIG. 24 Shows the RandomAccess inner loop after Enhanced         Pipeline Scheduling (EPS) stage 3 (last stage). The tree VLIW         instruction with label L2 executes at a rate of one iteration         per cycle.     -   FIG. 25 Shows the final Tree VLIWs for the RandomAccess inner         loop.     -   FIG. 26 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop,         part 1 of 7 (I/O pins of module).     -   FIG. 27 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop,         part 2 of 7 (register declarations).     -   FIG. 28 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop,         part 3 of 7 (Finite State Machine whose states are the tree VLIW         instructions with conditional execution).     -   FIG. 29 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop,         part 4 of 7 (Finite State Machine, continued).     -   FIG. 30 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop,         part 5 of 7 (Finite State Machine, continued).     -   FIG. 31 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop,         part 6 of 7 (Finite State Machine, combinatorial FIFO         handshaking outputs.).     -   FIG. 32 Shows the Verilog module for RandomAccess inner loop,         part 7 of 7 (quiescence detection circuit for the memory and         parent loop networks). The update instruction quiesces when the         number of requests equals the number of acknowledges. This inner         loop module becomes quiesced (input_quiesced=1) when the FSM is         in the start (idle) state, and all previously issued update         requests to memory have been completed. At this point, the FSM         starts waiting for a new loop invocation request.

To show in detail how an inner loop B waits for the quiescence of logically earlier instances of a dependent inner loop A, we also provide here the hardware implementation of the outer loop example mainLoop given in the paragraph above beginning with the words “To make dependences between complex instructions/inner loops more clear . . . ”. The following is the set of tree VLIW instructions for this outer loop with index i:

  //Tree VLIWs for mainLoop start: receive n=P, 0, 32, d0 i=0; goto loop loop: cc0 =i<n cc1=tst1 (i) cc2=tst2 (i) i_=i+1 goto L1 //tree VLIWs for mainLoop (continued) L1: if ( !cc0) {   send d0=P, 0, q1, q2;   goto start } else {  if(cc1) {   q1=send LOOPj1, i, q2   if(cc2) {    goto L2   } else {    i=i_;    cc0=i_<n    cc1=tst1 (i_)    cc2=tst2 (i_)    i_=i_+1    goto L1   } } else {   if(cc2) {    q2=send LOOPj2, i, q1    i=i_;    cc0=i_<n    cc1=tst1 (i_)    cc2=tst2 (i_)    i_=i_+1    goto L1   } else {    i=i_;    cc0=i_<n    cc1=tst1 (i_)    cc2=tst2 (i_)    i_=i_+1    goto L1   }  } } L2 :  q2=send LOOPj2, i, q1  i=i_;  cc0=i_<n  cc1=tst1 (i_)  cc2=tst2 (i_)  i_=i_+1  goto L1

The following Verilog code for mainLoop illustrates how waiting on quiescence flip flops is implemented. For example, referring to state S_L2 in the Verilog code below, where loop j2 is spawned, the LOOPj2_output_request signal for spawning loop j2 is set to the quiescence flip flop q1 of the prior dependent inner loop j1; therefore the LOOPj2_output_request signal will not be asserted until the quiescence flip flop q1 becomes 1. Also in state S L2, the state transition condition is specified as (LOOPj2_output_acknowledge && q1); therefore the transition to the next state after S_L2 will not occur before the quiescence flip flop q1 becomes 1. The FSM will freeze in state S_L2 while q1 remains 0. Other waiting requirements for quiescence flip-flops are handled similarly. Compared to software thread synchronization techniques using shared memory, a specialized hardware approach is much more efficient.

  //Verilog module header for mainLoop 'define tsti(x) ... 'define tst2(x) ... module mainLoop  (  input reset  ,input clock  //P (Parentloop network) slave port  ,input P_input_request  ,output reg P_input_acknowledge  ,input[31:0] P_input_payload  ,output reg P_output_request  ,input P_output_acknowledge  ,output reg[31:0] P_output_payload  //LOOPj1 master port  ,output reg LOOPj1_output_request  ,input LOOPj1_output_acknowledge  ,input LOOPj1_output_quiesced  ,output reg[31:0] LOOPj1_output_payload  //LOOPj2 master port  ,output reg LOOPj2_output_request  ,input LOOPj2_output_acknowledge  ,input LOOPj2_output_quiesced  ,output reg[31:0] LOOPj2_output_payload ) ; //register declarations for mainLoop reg[31:0] n,i,i_; reg cc0, cc1, cc2; //quiescence counter and flip-flop for LOOPj1 localparam LOOPj1_DELAY=10, LOG2_LOOPj1_DELAY=4; reg[LOG2_LOOPj1_DELAY:0] ctr_LOOPj1; wire q1=ctr_LOOPj1[LOG2_LOOPj1_DELAY] ; //quiescence counter and flip-flop for LOOPj2 localparam LOOPj2_DELAY=12, LOG2_LOOPj2_DELAY=4; reg[LOG2_LOOPj2_DELAY:0] ctr_LOOPj2; wire q2=ctr_LOOPj2[LOG2_LOOPj2_DELAY]; //main state machine for mainLoop reg[1:0] state; localparam S_START=0, S_LOOP=1, S_L1=2, S_L2=3; always @(posedge clock)  if(reset) begin   state <= S_START;  end else  casez(state)   //synthesis full case parallel case   S_START: casez (P_input_request)    1'b1: begin     //n=receive P, 0, 32     n <= P_input_payload;     i <= 0;     state <= S_LOOP;    end    default: begin end //wait for network   endcase   S_LOOP: begin    cc0 <= (i<n) ;    cc1 <= 'tst1 (i) ;    cc2 <= tst2 (i) ;    i_ <= i+1 ;    state <= S_L1 ;   end //main state machine for mainLoop (continued)   S_L1: casez({cc0, cc1, cc2,    P_output_acknowledge && q1 && q2,    LOOPj1_output_acknowledge && q2,    LOOPj2_output_acknowledge && q1})    //synthesis full case parallel case    6'b0??l??: begin     //send P, 0, q1, q2;     state <= S_START;    end    6'b110?1?,    6'b101??1,    6'b100???: begin     //if(cc1) send LOOPj1, i, q2     //else if(cc2) send LOOPj2, i, q1     i <=i_;     cc0 <= (i_<n);     cc1 <= 'tst1 (i_) ;     cc2 <= 'tst2 (i_) ;     i_ <= i_+1;     state <= S_L1;    end    6'b111?1?: begin     //send LOOPj1, i, q2     state <= S_L2;    end    default: begin end //wait for network   endcase    S_L2: casez(LOOPj2_output_acknowledge && q1)     1'b1: begin      //send LOOPj2, i, q1      i <= i_;      cc0 <= (i_<n);      cc1 <= 'tst1 (i_) ;      cc2 <= 'tst2 (i_) ;      i <= i_+1;      state <= S_L1;     end     default: begin end //wait for network    endcase   endcase //case(state) end //always //combinatorial outputs for mainLoop (1 of 3) always @(*) begin   case(state)   //synthesis parallel case full case   S_START: begin    //n=receive P, 0, 32    P_input_acknowledge=1;    P_output_request=0;    P_output_payload=0;    LOOPj1_output_request=0;    LOOPj1_output_payload=i;    LOOPj2_output_request=0;    LOOPj2_output_payload=i;   end //combinatorial outputs for mainLoop (2 of 3)  S_L1: casez ({cc0, cc1, cc2} )   3'b0?? : begin    //send P, 0, q1, q2    P_input_acknowledge=0;    P_output_request=(q1 && q2);    P_output_payload=0;    LOOPj1_output_request=0;    LOOPj1_output_payload=i;    LOOPj2_output_request=0;    LOOPj2_output_payload=i;   end   3'b110,   3'b111: begin    //send LOOPj1, i, q2    P_input_acknowledge=0;    P_output_request=0;    P_output_payload=0;    LOOPj1_output_request=q2;    LOOPj1_output_payload=i;    LOOPj2_output_request=0;    LOOPj2_output_payload=i;   end    3'b101: begin    //send LOOPj2, i, q1    P_input_acknowledge=0;    P_output_request=0;    P_output_payload=0;    LOOPj1_output_request=0;    LOOPj1_output_payload=i;    LOOPj2_output_request=q1;    LOOPj2_output_payload=i;   end   default: begin    //default outputs    P_input_acknowledge=0;    P_output_request=0;    P_output_payload=0;    LOOPj1_output_request=0;    LOOPj1_output_payload=i;    LOOPj2_output_request=0;    LOOPj2_output_payload=i;   end  endcase //combinatorial outputs for mainLoop (3 of 3)   S_L2: begin    //send LOOPj2, i, q1    P_input_acknowledge=0;    P_output_request=0;    P_output_payload=0;    LOOPj1_output_request=0;    LOOPj1_output_payload=i;    LOOPj2_output_request=q1;    LOOPj2_output_payload=i;   end   default: begin    //default outputs    P_input_acknowledge=0;    P_output_request=0;    P_output_payload=0;    LOOPj1_output_request=0;    LOOPj1_output_payload=i;    LOOPj2_output_request=0;    LOOPj2_output_payload=i;   end  endcase // case(state) end //always @(*) begin //quiescence circuits //LOOPj1 quiescence flip flop and counter begin always @ (posedge clock) begin  if(reset) begin   ctr_LOOPj1 <= −1;  end else if(!LOOPj1_output_quiesced | |   (LOOPj1_output_request && LOOPj1_output_acknowledge))   ctr_LOOPj1 <= LOOPj1_DELAY−1; begin  end else if(!ql) begin   ctr_LOOPj1 <= ctr_LOOPj1−1;  end end //LOOPj2 quiescence flip flop and counter always @(posedge clock) begin  if(reset) begin   ctr_LOOPj2 <= -1;  end else if(!LOOPj2_output_quiesced | |   (LOOPj2_output_request && LOOPj2_output_acknowledge))   ctr_LOOPj2 <= LOOPj2_DELAY-1;  end else if(!q2) begin   ctr_LOOPj2 <= ctr_LOOPj2−1;  end end endmodule

Quiescence flip-flops have the following problem that we should be aware of: When an inner loop A is initiated, setting quiescence flip-flop q1, and then inner loop B starts waiting on inner loop A's quiescence through q1, a new instance of inner loop A setting the same quiescence register q1 again cannot be started (a write-after-read dependence exists, since B is still reading and waiting for q1). Of course, for the new instance of A, we could use a new independent quiescence circuit and a different quiescence flip flop: The request message for the new instance of A should have a tag different from the request message for the old instance of A, and this tag should be propagated to all sub-tasks of the new and old instances of A, in order that the quiescence of activities emanating from the new and old instances of A can be independently determined. But to retain the hardware simplicity for the baseline supercomputer, we simply respect the write-after-read dependences within quiescence flip flops as follows: whenever there is a quiescence dependence (A,B), but there is no dependence (B,A), we add the dependence (B,A) to ensure the dependence is symmetric. In this manner, whenever B is waiting on an old instance of A, a new instance of A should in turn wait for B. Therefore, the new instance of A cannot overwrite the quiescence flip-flop that is now being read/waited on by B. This problem is also solved by optimization number 2 in the optimizations section, which describes a more general synchronization technique, which can be used in lieu of quiescence detection.

How to do Multiple Network Sends and Receives in the Same State/Cycle

When two send and/or receive operations are being done in the same FSM state and condition:

-   -   Exactly one data transfer should be done in each FIFO; and     -   The transition to the next state should wait until all FIFO         transfers specified within this state and condition are done.

For example, if memory operation 1 asserts output_request and gets output_acknowledge during the first cycle of a stalled state, while memory operation 2 asserts output_request but does not get an acknowledge for several cycles (therefore preventing a state transition), in the second cycle a second transfer of the same data should not occur on the sending FIFO of memory operation 1: therefore, further transmission should be stopped on the sending FIFO of memory operation 1, as soon one transfer has successfully been completed.

To prevent this potential error: we use

-   -   A request satisfied flip-flop for each sending fifo interface;         and     -   An acknowledge satisfied flip-flop for each receiving fifo         interface.

A request_satisfied flip-flop operates and is used as follows:

-   -   The request_satisfied flip-flop is set to zero at system reset         time     -   If the request_satisfied flip-flop is zero, and a transfer on         this FIFO is requested and it is about to occur (output_request         and output_acknowledge are both 1), but the current state cannot         complete because of some other stall condition, the         request_satisfied flip-flop is set to one.     -   If the request_satisfied flip-flop is one, and all stall         conditions within the state are resolved, allowing transition to         the next state, the request_satisfied flip-flop is set to zero         again.     -   The outgoing output_request is set to (!request satisfied),         thus, all communication on this FIFO is inhibited while the         request_satisfied flip-flop is on.     -   For the case of the two simultaneous send operations, the state         transition to the next state will occur when         (request_satisfied∥output_acknowledge1) &&         (request_satisfied2∥output_acknowledge2). More than two         simultaneous sends are similarly handled.

Receive FIFOs operate similarly, with an acknowledge_satisfied flip-flop.

The objective of the request_satisfied flip-flop is to prevent further FIFO transactions once a transition occurs within a state, and also to send output_request and input_acknowledge signals with very little logic delays at the beginning of the cycle (output_request is connected to the inverted version of the request satisfied flip-flop, AND'ed with the one-hot state flip-flop and tree path condition within that state).

If during a receive operation, the old value of a register r1 which is accepting the data is also the source of a sending FIFO performing a concurrent send operation, and the sending FIFO is stalled but the receiving FIFO is not stalled, the sending FIFO might incorrectly send the new value of r1 instead of the old value of r1 (which would violate a dependence over register r1). To solve this, the compiler should avoid using the same register as the source of a sending FIFO and the destination of a receiving FIFO, within the same state and condition. Where this is not possible, whenever the receiving FIFO is about to transfer data to r1, but there is a concurrent send of the old value of r1 which is stalled, the incoming data should be received into a different register r1′, and then r1′ should be copied to r1, when all stall conditions are removed and the transition to the next state is made.

How to Receive Responses Out of Order

In a memory network with multiple ports and multiple interleaved banks, load request 0 and load request 1 may be sent from the same port in that order, but load request 0 may go to bank 0 causing a cache miss, and load request 1 may go to a different bank, say bank 3, causing a cache hit. Therefore the response to request 1 may come back before the response to request 0.

To be able to identify which request is being responded to when out of order responses are possible, a tag is added as an additional least significant field of a request, as described in FIG. 13 .

For each tag number i=0, . . . , n−1 of the given master port, where n is the maximum number of outstanding requests, the following registers are created:

-   -   Tag i busy flip-flop (1 bit). This is 1 if and only if a request         with this tag number i has been sent out, but the response has         not come back yet.     -   Tag i data register (N bits, equal to the payload width of the         receiving FIFO of the master port).

The number of tags should be approximately equal to the pipeline depth of a primitive operation (or the loop replication count of an inner loop), subject to resource constraints. Tags are used in round-robin order. The sending of a request is stalled while the tag busy flip-flop for the next tag number to use is 1 (which means that the response for the last request using this tag has not come back yet). When the tag busy flip-flop is finally 0, and the send request is accepted by the network, the send operation finally succeeds by returning the next tag number, while the tag counter for this sending FIFO is incremented modulo the total number of tags. Even though sends and receives are pipelined, the receive operation corresponding to a send, will use the same tag that was used for the send, in order to ensure that the correct response is received.

When the response to a request with tag x has arrived at the receiving FIFO of the present master port, it is immediately accepted into the tag x data register, and the tag x busy flip-flop is set to 0 again.

A receive operation for tag x now becomes a purely local operation within the thread unit. The receive operation

receive r1=NW, x, . . .

stalls until the tag number x busy flip-flop is zero, and then receives the contents of tag x data register into the destination register r1.

This guarantees that even if the responses to requests come back out of order, the responses are saved in the corresponding tag data register. If and when the state machine finally gets to process that response, it will be available in its tag data register.

The thread unit may send requests for operations without side effects (such as loads, multi-cycle operations such as divide, or even inner loops) speculatively, that is, without waiting for the condition guarding the request in the original sequential program to be computed. Speculative execution often improves performance. To support speculative execution, the memory system should be prepared to receive load requests from non-existent or otherwise inaccessible addresses, since a speculative load on an untaken path can attempt to access just any value as an address, including invalid values. If the speculatively sent request is not on the actual taken path, the corresponding response, if any, is still always received by the thread unit, but may remain unused. To maintain frequency, once a request for a speculative operation is sent out by a master port of a thread unit, it will not be canceled by this thread unit even if the speculation is later found to be incorrect. A speculatively issued inner loop nest that is on an untaken path may take a long time, or may not even terminate, since the loop exit condition may depend on garbage (for example, if an inner loop is speculatively issued whose “loop count” comes from a tagged union in C++ code, before checking the tag of the union, there is no telling what the “loop count field” really contains). Therefore, speculatively issued inner loop nests should be confined to those which the compiler can prove will terminate in a reasonable time regardless of whether the speculation is correct. However, optimization number 8 within the optimizations section will relax this restriction.

The response to a speculative load operation with tag x is always accepted into the tag x data register. However, the response may remain unused since the load was not on the taken path. In this case, the same tag x data register will be overwritten at the next opportunity where tag x is re-used.

As a frequency optimization, an incoming response to the receiving FIFO and its tag can be accepted into a staging buffer without checking the tag of the incoming data, and written back to the corresponding tag data register on the next cycle. When the tag data register is read during a receive operation on this port, the data will be bypassed from the staging buffer, if it is still there, and is not yet stored in the tag data register.

Out of order reception of responses costs one extra cycle in terms of minimum latency.

This approach does not solve the latency tolerance problem, pipelined responses are still processed in the order they were sent by the finite state machine. In fact, responses sometimes should be processed in order because of dependences, for example, exceptions occurring in inner loops of a loop, invoked in a pipelined manner with hierarchical software pipelining, should be checked in the original sequential order. But the responses can arrive in an arbitrary order; and the circuit will still function correctly thanks to the tags described in the present section. Remedies to the latency tolerance problem are discussed in optimization number 9 Later in this document.

Designing an out-of-order response unit: In case the number of tags (maximum number of outstanding requests) is large, it is no longer possible to use flip-flops and registers. Similarly when incoming messages have variable length, tag data registers are no longer appropriate. One idea, in this case, is to use a circular buffer, made out of a multi-ported SRAM, that mimicks the algorithm given above.

Partitioning Large Designs

Now that we have covered the conversion of a loop/program region to a hardware thread unit, and have also described the construction of the top level design, we can go back to the problem of partitioning large designs that do not fit on a chip.

Partitioning a Design Across Multiple Chips

It is clear that, as a result of hierarchical software pipelining, an array of inner loops, where each inner loop contains its own array of inner loops, where each inner loop contains its own array of inner loops, and so on, will quickly fill up the area of a single chip for an application with sufficient parallelism. For this reason, application-specific supercomputers should be implemented using multiple communicating chips. However, for lowering the cost of testing and manufacturing, chips and boards/rack modules should preferably follow a standard uniform format, the chip-to-chip communication mechanism should use a well-understood scalable network (an incomplete hypercube implemented with high-speed serial communication cables in this embodiment) and the messages going across chips should preferably follow a standard format rather than a custom format.

First, a flat design is created that assumes all components and networks will fit on a single chip as described in the section on the top level design. Notice that a component can communicate with another component only through a network. This property is essential for making partitioning easy.

Note that the memory hierarchy “black box” super-component in the flat design can also be partitioned across chips, by exploding the super-component into its internal components and networks, before partitioning.

Now we regard this flat design as a hypergraph [30], with hypervertices being components, and hyperedges being the networks. I.e., a network, when viewed as a hyperedge, is the set of components (hypervertices) this network connects to. Using a heuristic hyperedge weight, such as network communication volume obtained from a software or hardware profiler (the communication volume will be proportional to the number of loads/stores that were executed for a given memory, or the total inner loop register parameters and results communicated over a task network, all available from the basic profiler-feedback statistics), the components of the flat design hypergraph are partitioned into multiple chips while trying to minimize the weight of the cut set edges (cutsize) and trying to achieve an almost equal distribution (e.g., ranging from 45%-55% to 55%-45%) of each kind of resource in each component. As a result, a mapping is created from each component to its partition number (chip number).

If a hypergraph bipartitioning algorithm (e.g., [30]) which creates two almost equal sized hypergraphs from one while minimizing the cutsize is available, it can be used to recursively partition a design into as many chips as needed until all resource constraints are satisfied. Here is a recursive hypergraph bipartitioning algorithm in pseudo C++ code:

  int part[ ];//maps each vertex to its part number int partNo= −1; //part no. counter //recursively bipartition hypergraph (V,E) void partition (  const set<HyperVertex>& V  ,const set<set<HyperVertex> >& E,  ,const Weights maxweight) {  if (vertex_weight(V) > maxweight) {   //resources are exceeded,   //try to cut them in half,   //while minimizing the cutsize   set<HyperVertex> V1,V2;   tie(V1, V2) = bipartition(V,E);   set<set<HyperVertex> > N1, N2;   foreach(n,E) {     // hyperedge splitting     set<HyperVertex> n1 =n.intersection(V1);     set<HyperVertex> n2 =n.intersection(V2);     if (n1.size( ) > 1) N1 = N1.insert(nl};     if (n2.size( ) > 1) N2 = N2.insert(n2};    }    partition( V1, N1, maxweight);    partition( V2, N2, maxweight);   } else {    partNo++; foreach (u,V) part [u]=partNo;  } }

Inter-partition communication has a significant energy cost. Notice that by minimizing the inter-partition communication volume at each recursive bipartitioning step, the partitioning algorithm above will also reduce the total energy consumption of the application specific supercomputer, by preferring not to partition networks that have a high communication volume.

Finally, for each network such that not all the endpoint components are on the same chip, a partial network (also formed from butterfly sub-networks or task sub-networks) is created on each chip, which is also connected to the chip I/O controller. For simplicity, messages are sent by components as if the design were flat (destination port=flat network output port number). The partial network uses a custom routing lookup table ROM to convert a destination (master or slave) port of the original flat design network to a destination port of the local partial network on the present chip, before a message enters the local partial network. An extra local output port field is appended to the first word of the message for local routing (the word size is expanded if needed), which then guides the message to the correct local output port, through normal incomplete butterfly network operation.

The purpose of the I/O controller component on each chip is to route an internal network message from the chip containing the message source component, to the chip containing the message destination component. Components normally communicate over highly customized application-specific networks. When not all components attached to a customized network Y can be placed on a single chip, the I/O controller makes it possible for a component on a first chip A to send a message to a component on a second chip B over network Y, in effect extending the custom application-specific network Y over multiple chips.

-   -   The I/O controller on the first chip A accepts the message from         the source component through the local partial Y network,         converts the message to a standard format (variable length         messages with 64 bit words, with a header word indicating the         destination chip, the global network id for Y, and a bit         indicating whether this message is a request or response, and         the length of the message), and sends it outside the chip, to a         (possibly incomplete) hypercube network. The format change         typically requires a payload size change (wide to narrow or         narrow to wide conversion). Task network requests are sent to         the next higher numbered chip, which contains a component         attached to the same task network. When there is no such higher         numbered chip, the request is sent to the lowest numbered chip         that has a component attached to this task network. Chips         internally use Gray code numbering, so sending a message to the         next higher numbered chip becomes a neighbor to neighbor         communication on a hypercube. Normal (non-task) requests are         sent to the correct chip containing the destination component,         through greedy deterministic incomplete hypercube routing.     -   I/O controllers of several chips on the way route the message to         the correct next chip in the incomplete hypercube network, using         a greedy deterministic incomplete hypercube routing algorithm         (described in APPENDIX G) until the message reaches the         destination chip B.     -   The I/O controller on chip B accepts the message, deletes the         header word, and converts the message back to the original         customized format of the Y network, by a message payload size         change (narrow to wide or wide to narrow conversion). The         message is then delivered to the destination component on chip B         by the local partial Y network.

FIG. 33 , FIG. 34 , and FIG. 35 , show the partitions resulting from the flat design for RandomAccess in FIG. 19 , including the I/O controllers on each partition. To improve the presentation, we made these figures independent of the internal implementation details of the memory hierarchy, by assuming that the memory hierarchy components have been put together again as a partial super-component in each partition.

Reducing NRE Costs Through Chip Unioning

While the application-specific supercomputer can be prototyped by using FPGAs, in order to benefit from the performance and power reduction advantages of an ASIC, an ideal solution is to use an ASIC instead of FPGAs when creating the final accelerator after all optimizations are done. However, releasing different ASICs for each partition will likely incur Non Recurring Expenses (such as mask expenses) multiple times. The final partitioning algorithm will attempt to distribute almost equal number of components of a given type to each chip. The compiler can then apply chip unioning to the partitions, in order to create a union chip that can act as any one of the partitions depending on the initial value of configuration registers and SRAMs added to the design, which will be written at system initialization time to make each chip, on each rack module, on each rack, realize the correct partition. The initialization of the configuration SRAMs can be done with a separate small embedded microprocessor and a separate serial bus connected to the configuration I/O pins of all chips in the system. Based on the initial value of the configuration SRAMs/registers, the union chip can act as one of several partitions of a design. The components within the union chip will still be implemented with custom logic within the ASIC design, and the union chip will be recompiled to accommodate the extra delays for accessing the configuration SRAMs and the extra latencies of enlarged networks due to chip unioning; thus, the ASIC performance advantage will likely remain intact within the union chip.

Creating such a union chip in the context of an FPGA prototype of the supercomputer can also help reduce total FPGA synthesis and implementation time and FPGA programming time at application startup. However, the union FPGA chip will require more resources than any individual partition.

To explain chip unioning, we will call the components of the original flat design the global components. We will call the master (slave) port numbers of a network of the original flat design the global master (slave) port numbers. Notice that after chip unioning, all messages are still sent with global master port and global slave port numbers of the flat design (pretending that the design was never partitioned). Translation tables (that are part of the configuration SRAMs of the union chip) convert a global master (slave) port number to a local master (slave) port number on the union chip, and handle the correct inter-chip and intra-chip routing on the different instances of the union chip. The following are the main configuration SRAMs/registers that are needed to make a union chip realize a particular partition.

For each partition:

-   -   For each partitioned network which is connected to at least one         global component in the partition,         -   The global slave port number to local slave port number map.             The value of this map for a global slave port number, is             -   the local slave port number of the I/O controller, if                 the desired global slave port number is not in this                 partition, and             -   the local slave port number this global slave port                 number was mapped to within this partition, otherwise.         -   The global master port number to local master port number             map. The value of this map for a global master port number,             is             -   the local master port number of the I/O controller, if                 the desired global master port number is not in this                 partition, and             -   the local master port number this global master port                 number was mapped to within this partition, otherwise.     -   These maps ensure that the message is routed to the correct port         of the correct global component within the partitioned and         unioned variant of the design.

Regardless of the partition:

-   -   For each partitioned network         -   A global slave port number to partition number map denoting             the partition which contains that global slave port number.         -   A global master port number to partition number map denoting             the partition which contains that global master port number.     -   These tables are needed by the union chip I/O controller, so it         can identify the destination chip to send a request or response         message. These tables are the same for all partitions and can be         therefore placed in a ROM in the union chip. If a simple regular         distribution, such as a block or cyclic distribution [32], is         used by the partitioning algorithm, not even a ROM is needed:         the destination partition number can be obtained in this case         from a substring of the bit string representing the global port         number.

For each partition:

-   -   For each partitioned task network that is connected to at least         one component in the partition,         -   a next partition register indicating the next higher             partition number where there is a thread unit connected to             this task network. If there are no more thread units in the             remaining partitions, then the next partition register             contains the smallest partition number where there is a             thread unit connected to the task network.         -   Notice that a task parameters message travels through all             thread units connected to a task network until it finds a             free thread unit, going back to the beginning if there are             no free thread units anywhere. The partition id's use Gray             coding internally (e.g., the binary partition id numbers 00,             01, 10, 11 become 00, 01, 11, 10 in Gray code), so this             forwarding approach often results in neighbor-to-neighbor             routing in a hypercube.

For each partition:

-   -   a local component presence mask, whose one bit represents the         subset of local components to which some global component is         mapped in this partition. When the presence mask bit is zero for         a local component, no global component is mapped to this local         component, which then does nothing in this partition. This         component can be powered off to reduce leakage current.

FIG. 36 shows the results of chip unioning applied to the partitions created from RandomAccess. The local components of a given type are given the sequence ids A, B, C, . . . while the global flat design components of the same type were given the sequence ids 0, 1, 2, . . . . FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 show the different contents of configuration SRAMs required for realizing each partition.

Let us say that a set of identical global components forms a component type. Examples are: a thread unit for a particular inner loop, replicated many times, or an L2 cache that is replicated many times.

The union chip is constructed from the flat design and its partitions as follows:

For each component type t:

-   -   Create on the union chip the maximum number of instances of the         given type that occurred in any partition.     -   For each partition, create a global to local component map that         assigns each global component of type t in the partition to a         same-type local component of the common chip, greedily, in         increasing numerical order of global components and local         components. This map will be called the local version of a         global component of type t in a given partition.         -   Note that, a local component of type t may remain unused in             a given partition, if no global component of the partition             is mapped to it.

Create the union chip networks.

-   -   For each global network that occurred in any partition, create         an instance of the same network     -   Create an instance of the I/O controller     -   Create the maximum number of external (serial) chip-to-chip         communication devices that occurred on any partition. Connect         all these serial communication devices to the I/O controller         with a one to one network.     -   For each network n:         -   If the I/O controller is connected to the network n with a             master port on any partition, also connect the I/O             controller with a master port to network n on the union             chip.         -   If the I/O controller is connected to the network n with a             slave port on any partition, also connect the IO controller             with a slave port to network n on the union chip.     -   The I/O controller will thus be assigned the local master         (slave) port number 0 for each of the networks it is connected         to, with a master (slave) port.     -   For each local component x on the union chip:         -   For each (partitioned or non-partitioned) network n that x             will be connected to,             -   For each internal master port m of component x connected                 to network n                 -   Connect this internal port m to the next local                     master port m′ of local network n on the union chip.             -   For each internal slave port m of component x connected                 to network n                 -   Connect this internal slave port m to the next local                     slave port m′ of local network n on the union chip.     -   This will complete the creation and wiring of the local         components, local networks and the I/O controller on the union         chip. APPENDIX K gives an additional algorithm for creating the         configuration SRAMs and registers for each partition, which         completes the construction of the union chip.

How to manage finite resources on the union chip: The union chip should contain at least one instance of each component type. Thus, if including one of each component type already exceeds resources on the union chip, aggressive optimizations that increase the number of component types (such as creating customized caches through specialization) should be confined to the most critical components.

To increase the chances that the union chip will fit in the target technology, the partitioning algorithm should give high priority to dividing all component types equally among partitions, while also minimizing the volume of cross-partition communication. The union chip should preferably have a large area to start with.

After partitioning, the union chip still may not fit in the target technology, even though each partition alone fits. For example when one partition contains 1 X component and 100 Y components, and another contains 100 X components and 1 Y component, causing the union chip to have 100 X components and 100 Y components and exceeding the allowed area, one can apply the following algorithm to break up offending groups of components contributing to a large area on the union chip, through additional partitioning:

  Let A(p,t)= total area of components of type t on partition p Let N(p,t) = number of components of type t on partition p while(the union chip does not fit) {  within { (p,t) | N(p,t)>1} find a (p,t) which  maximizes A(p,t).  bipartition p, giving high priority to equal  distribution of resources. }

Optimizations

Several optimizations can be applied over the baseline technique for generating an application specific supercomputer from a sequential program, which was described above.

1. Customized Partitioned Memory

By means of custom partitioning of the memory hierarchy in an application specific supercomputer obtained by applying the present document's techniques, its memory system performance can be improved. The idea of customized partitioning of memory for creating application specific hardware was disclosed in the co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/156,881 (entitled “storage unsharing”) by the present inventors. In that document, the basic memory partitioning idea and its many optimizations were presented in detail as stand-alone concepts for potential memory system performance improvements in an application-specific hardware accelerator. We will briefly summarize this technique here, and additionally provide an algorithm for constructing the customized, partitioned memory hierarchy of an application-specific supercomputer, using the concepts of this technique.

This optimization partitions the memory of application-specific hardware compiled from a software program, into multiple smaller memories that can operate independently and in parallel, without needing coherence. Multiple smaller memories can provide improved performance, energy savings, and area savings, compared to the baseline system with a single, unified memory and coherent caches.

Through symbolic execution-based dependence analysis of memory load, store and update instructions in the program (as described in APPENDIX J), the storage unsharing technique creates a memory address space hierarchy tree, whose root is the software application memory address space. Each node in the memory address space hierarchy is also annotated with the hierarchical program region where the memory address space is active. Each child memory address space (henceforth to be called just memory) contains only a subset of the addresses in its parent memory. All memories use the same addressing structure (i.e., if a data structure at address x in the software application memory is present in a node of the memory tree, it is also located at the same address x within that node). Because the children of a given parent memory are guaranteed, by virtue of dependence analysis, not to share any writable addresses among them, these children do not need to be coherent among themselves.

The root memory MEM (the software application address space) is always active. A child memory becomes active only during the scope of a hierarchical program region (loop, or begin-end block), from the time the region starts and until the time the region ends. The immediate child memories of MEM become active during the top program region. At the entry to the region which constitutes the scope where a child memory MEMc is active, MEMc is initialized from its parent memory MEMp (the contents of the memory addresses that will be read during the execution the region are conceptually copied from MEMp to MEMc) with a link MEMc=MEMp instruction. At the end of the region which constitutes the scope where MEMc is active, the changes made to the child memory MEMc during the execution of the region, are flushed back to the parent MEMp, with an unlink MEMp=MEMc instruction. The original program's memory instructions are changed to refer to specific different memories, instead of a single memory MEM.

Memories are frequently implemented as caches, such that

-   -   a link MEMc=MEMp is implemented as a no-op (meaning: start MEMc         as an empty cache, and bring in lines from its parent MEMp cache         as misses occur in the MEMc cache); and     -   an unlink MEMp=MEMc results in the efficient flushing of all         dirty lines of the MEMc cache to the parent MEMp cache, and the         efficient invalidation of all the lines in the MEMc cache.

When initialization or final flushing of a child memory is not necessary (as in the case of a data structure locally declared on the stack) the link MEMc=MEMp instruction can be optimized as link MEMc=NULL (meaning: let MEMc be initialized with undefined contents), and unlink MEMp=MEMc can be optimized as unlink NULL=MEMc (meaning do not flush the changed lines in MEMc, just invalidate all the lines in MEMc). More details are given in the above-mentioned co-pending patent application.

We provide here an algorithm for creating a customized memory hierarchy for an application-specific supercomputer using these concepts. The algorithm takes the following inputs:

-   -   i. The abstract memory hierarchy created by the maximal         recursive application of storage unsharing to the program, and     -   ii. Profiling feedback information about the locality of access         for each memory instruction;

and produces the following output:

The non-partitioned, flat structural hardware design for the memory hierarchy.

First, the maximal memory hierarchy is examined for memory nodes that can be removed, using the following techniques:

Register promotion,

L1 cache removal due to lack of locality of access, and

Removal of unprofitable memory nodes.

To remove a node from the memory hierarchy tree, the following technique is used:

Convert the children of this node into the new children of the parent of this node;

Detach this node from its parent; and

Finally delete the node.

Register promotion by compiling the write-update snoopy cache protocol: When all the memory instructions accessing a memory within a region refer to one single address through the region which is the scope of the memory, the memory is implemented as a register. The register is:

-   -   Loaded from its parent memory within the region as soon as the         address in the parent memory is computed (if the memory location         is read before being written) and     -   Stored back to the same address in the parent memory when         exiting the region (in case the memory location is live outside         the region, and the register may have been modified during the         region).

Loads from the memory location now copy from the register, and stores to the memory location now copy to the register, thus eliminating the references to the memory location within the region.

Application-specific hardware has many more registers than a general purpose processor (which typically has 8-32 registers), thus, register promotion can indeed reduce memory references compared to a general purpose processor.

When there are two or more memory instructions referencing the memory address space, each with a distinct address expression, registers are still used for eliminating memory references, but for each distinct address expression, the behavior of snoopy write update caches each with a single one-word line, is compiled into customized finite state machine hardware. For example, referring to FIG. 39 , assume that in a program region to be converted to a finite state machine, there are loads and stores to A[j] and A[k], but that the compiler does not know if j==k at run time. This is a difficult compilation problem: existing register promotion techniques for general purpose processors leave these accesses as loads/stores to memory, and are unable to place them in a register. But hardware is more resourceful than a general purpose microprocessor. Referring again to FIG. 39 , here is how the compiled finite state machine code acts like snoopy write-update caches:

-   -   An initial load from A[j] proceeds as a usual load.     -   Then, an initial load from A[k] gets the data from the already         cached A[k] that is available in a register if (k==j), and from         A[k] in memory, otherwise.     -   Subsequent loads and stores just use or update the cached         register value of A[k].     -   Then, a store into A[k] updates the cached register value of         A[k] and also updates the cached register value of A[j] as well,         if (k==j).

Accesses to A[j] are similarly optimized. Many loads/stores are eliminated in this manner throughout the region. At the end of the region, the cached values of A[j] and A[k] are stored into the parent memory (A) (if they could have been altered); and the single line, single word register caches of A[j] and A[k] are conceptually invalidated. Note that the final stores into A[j] and A[k] can occur in any order, and give the correct result regardless of whether j==k or not: if j==k, both stores will store the same value to the same address, thus, the ordering of these stores is irrelevant. This technique can be easily generalized to more than two distinct address expressions and to general control flow. Notice that armed with a state-of-the-art compiler dependence analysis algorithm for avoiding unneeded runtime address comparisons, and special purpose customized circuits, very aggressive register promotion can be done as a result of the present technique while constructing a customized finite state machine for a region, above and beyond existing register promotion techniques for general purpose processors. Even though we are presenting the present register promotion technique as part of the memory hierarchy design, because the technique enforces dependences between memory instructions and bypasses data directly between memory instructions, it is in fact a customized hardware synchronization unit, inlined into the main finite state machine of the thread unit.

A memory that is register-allocated is removed from the memory hierarchy. Register allocation is an optimization that should be done on the sequential code, before scheduling and software pipelining for creating the finite state machine begins.

Removing L1 caches of memories with low locality of reference: Memory hierarchies involving L1 caches, are simply pointless for very large data structures randomly accessed within some scientific and commercial applications with low locality of reference: all references to the data structure will cause an L1 cache miss in such applications, leading to wasted energy and increased latency due to the L1 caches. Only large amounts of DRAM can accommodate the working set of such applications (RandomAccess is one such example application). When, through profiling feedback, it is determined that accesses to a certain memory node have a low locality of reference, the memory node is removed from the hierarchy. If the parent memory is not already the lowest level, it is similarly removed.

Removing unprofitable memory nodes: Creating a child memory MEMc of a parent memory MEMp has the benefits of:

-   -   Removing coherence hardware between MEMc and the siblings of         MEMc in the memory hierarchy tree,     -   Achieving a smaller amount of physical as well as logical ports         in caches/SRAMs implementing MEMc, and     -   Possibly creating a specialized small cache for MEMc (e.g., an         SRAM or flip-flop implementation, with fewer data and address         bits).

Creating a child memory MEMc of a parent memory MEMp has the cost of:

-   -   Reading lines from MEMp to MEMc (if needed) for initialization,         and flushing changed lines from MEMc to MEMp (if needed) at the         end of the region.

If the data will be used just once between the time it is loaded from MEMp to MEMc and then stored from MEMc back to MEMp, the child memory will likely just waste energy. Therefore the average re-use rate for a memory node (average number uses of each datum loaded from a parent memory) should be measured by a profiler and should be used within a cost-benefit calculation that also depends on the technology parameters. Unprofitable memory nodes should be removed.

Notice that the costs of flushing the dirty lines of a child cache to the parent cache, and invalidating all lines in a child cache, can be reduced by:

-   -   Using the following hardware algorithm for flushing groups of         dirty lines within a dirty line bit set, without needing to         search sequentially through all cache lines:

  for(x=dirtyLineSet; x!=0; x=resetRightmostOneBit (x) ) {  flush (oneHot2Binary (isolateRightmostOneBit (x) ) ) ; } Where: resetRightmostOneBit (x) = (~ (−x) ) &x; //1010−> 1000 isolateRightMostOneBit (x) = (−x) &x; //1010−> 0010 oneHot2Binary(x) = a hardware encoder for mapping  a one-hot encoded number to the corresponding  binary number, e.g.,  0001 −>00, 0010−>01, 0100−>10, 1000−>11

-   -   Using one of the following techniques for invalidating all lines         in the child cache:         -   Implementing an “SRAM reset” hardware function, for             resetting the entire contents of the SRAM array for the             “line valid” bit to 0; or         -   Using a “current region invocation time stamp” in an             existing SRAM technology without a reset function:             -   Storing the value of the current region invocation time                 stamp in the cache line tag as new lines are brought in                 from the parent cache;             -   Incrementing the time stamp register after the                 completion of each region invocation;             -   Treating lines with an outdated time stamp as invalid                 during child cache accesses;             -   Really invalidating all lines in the child cache only                 when the time stamp register overflows its limit.

The surviving memory nodes in the revised memory hierarchy are implemented in hardware with the following algorithm:

-   -   First, initial transformations are done (applicable to both leaf         and non-leaf memories)         -   Compaction of address space: If possible, a forward address             transformation (converting a program address to a compact             array address) and a reverse address transformation             (converting a compact array address to a program address) is             added, to remove holes (unused locations) in the address             space, and to improve spatial locality of accesses within             the region, at the expense of applying the address             transformations during the initialization and flushing of             the child memory. For example, a normally non-contiguous row             of a matrix in a column-major layout, is made contiguous in             the child memory containing the row, with a forward             transformation consisting of subtracting a base address, and             dividing by the spacing between elements. A reverse             transformation of multiplying by the spacing between             elements and adding the base address is used for computing             the address in the parent memory, for the purpose of             flushing an entry.         -   Removal of dead, constant or redundant bits: Dead, constant             or redundant bits (bits that are copies of other bits) in             the region where the memory is active, are removed from both             the address and data bits of this memory. These bits are not             implemented in the physical data arrays (register array,             SRAM, L1 cache, L2 cache) for this memory. An unimplemented             bit is re-instantiated when flushing the changed locations             in the child memory to the parent, whenever the bit does             exist as a non-constant bit in the region of the parent.             Address and data bits that appear constant within the region             as indicated by thorough profiling of individual memory             instructions, but are not provably constant, can be             speculatively left unimplemented, and (i) an error can be             raised, (ii) the accelerator results can be discarded,             and (iii) execution can switch to the original software, if             an address bit or data bit does not have the expected             constant value at run time.

Now that the compaction transformations and data and address bit removal are possibly in place, a hardware module is instantiated for each memory node, as follows:

If a leaf memory is being realized:

-   -   If the memory has a single port         -   If this memory is read only within its region, and the             addresses used within the region follow a predictable             sequence accessed within a loop (such as a fixed stride             array access a[i] in a loop with index i, or an indirectly             addressed sequence a[f(i)] in a loop with index i, where f             is any function, not necessarily a one-to-one function) a             streaming load cache is created for this memory. A request             containing the beginning address, parameters for the f             function, and (if known) the number of items in the             sequence, is first sent by the thread unit before entering             the loop. Each data item of the sequence is then received by             the thread unit, with multiple back-to-back receives from             the same master port. The addresses of the elements to be             fetched are not sent, the streaming load cache figures them             out by itself. Where possible, the streaming load cache will             speculatively prefetch the next lines from its parent cache             or from its small local storage, and will keep the next             element to be read in a register for fast access. If the             number of items to load is unknown even at run time when the             loop is entered, a request to stop sending further data is             sent by the thread unit to the streaming load cache to             conserve energy, immediately after the loop is exited.         -   If this memory node is write-only within its region, and the             address sequence is a predictable sequence accessed within a             loop (such as fixed stride array access a[i] in a loop with             index i, or an indirectly accessed sequence a[f(i)] in a             loop with index i, where f is any function, not necessarily             a one-to-one function), a streaming store cache is created.             First, a request containing the beginning address, the extra             parameters to the f function, and (if known) the number of             items in the sequence is sent to the streaming cache before             entering the loop. Then, the sequence of the data items to             be stored is sent back-to-back inside the loop using the             same master port. The addresses of the data items to be             stored are not sent; the streaming store cache figures them             out by itself. At the exit of the loop a special word             indicating end-of-data is sent from the same master port,             unless the number of items was already known in the             beginning of the loop. The streaming store cache will write             the incoming data first to its small local storage and then             to its parent cache, and will always buffer the incoming             data items in registers, for fast access.         -   If the address range of the memory node is bounded by a             small compile time constant (as in accesses to a row of a             matrix):             -   an SRAM or flip-flop register file covering the address                 range is used instead of an L1 cache                 -   If any SRAM/register file element may be used before                     being set, at the entry to the region, the SRAM is                     initialized from the parent memory node, as the                     implementation of the link instruction.                 -   If any memory location is modified within the region                     and used outside the region, at the exit of the                     region the changed entries of the SRAM/flip-flop                     register file are written back to the parent cache,                     as the implementation of the unlink instruction.         -   Otherwise (if the address range of the memory is not             bounded)             -   A pipelined L1 cache with a single slave port for                 receiving loads/stores and a single master port for                 sending line reads/line flushes to the parent memory, is                 used

Else (for a multiple port leaf memory)

-   -   If the address range of the memory is bounded by a small compile         time constant     -   A multi-ported flip-flop array or a bank-interleaved shared SRAM         with fixed size, covering the address range is used instead of         an L1 cache:         -   If any SRAM/register file element may be used before being             set, at the entry to the region, the SRAM/register file is             initialized from the parent cache, when implementing the             link instruction.         -   If any modified location within the SRAM/register file is             used outside the region, at the exit of the region, the             changed entries of the SRAM/register file are written back             to the parent cache, when implementing the unlink             instruction.     -   Otherwise (leaf node, where the address range is not bounded)     -   Like a very small version of the scalable globally coherent         memory design described in FIG. 16 and APPENDIX E, each port is         connected to dedicated L1 caches, which are in turn connected to         each other via one or more directories with a directory-based         write update protocol. The directory bits for each child are in         kept in extra bits of the parent cache line. The directory bits,         whenever they are not all zeros are cached in the directory         within the child memory. This directory bit caching within the         child memory, enables the identification of the owners of an L1         cache line, without accessing the directory bits in the slower         lower-level parent cache.     -   The directories access the parent cache, when a requested line         is not present in any of the coherent group of L1 caches     -   Else (A non-leaf memory)         -   In case there are no performance critical accesses by a             thread unit to the non-leaf cache,             -   A bank-interleaved organization is chosen to support                 requests both from child caches and thread units.         -   Else             -   A directory-based write-invalidate organization is                 chosen to support requests both from child caches and                 the thread units.

Implementing the Root Memory:

-   -   The data and tag arrays of each L2 cache in the system are in a         DRAM adjacent to it. The L2 cache controller itself contains         just the pipeline controls. A simple approach is to use all the         L2 caches in the supercomputer collectively as a robust         bank-interleaved L2 cache for the root memory. The dirty lines         of the L2 cache should be flushed to the software application         memory at the end of the accelerated code fragment. The children         of MEM that do not need to be flushed back to the root memory         (e.g., stack variables) can be mapped to regions of the DRAM         above a certain fixed address. The lines above the fixed address         will not be flushed to the root memory when the accelerated code         fragment finishes. In this manner, the accelerator can use much         more memory than the maximum allowed for a 32-bit software         application. If the accelerator memory is indeed much larger         than the application address space, this approach guarantees         that the actual software application will service only mandatory         cache misses. Also if an error is detected before committing the         changes in the L2 back to the application memory, the commit can         be canceled as an error recovery technique.     -   Another approach is to use a different L2 to implement each         immediate child of the root memory MEM. In this case each L2         needs to include a dirty bit mask in its tag, to prevent false         sharing.

Hardware implementation of a memory hierarchy node: Memory nodes with a fixed small number of memory locations, implemented with a flip-flop register array or plain SRAM, are best realized if inlined into the finite state machine of the region, without send or receive operations, since the access time will usually be fixed for such a memory node. Otherwise, the realization of a memory hierarchy node is a black box selected from a parametrizable library of memory hardware modules, that has one or more slave ports receiving requests from thread units and child caches, and one or more master ports sending read line/flush line requests to the parent cache. The cache data and tag arrays can be outside the box (as in the case of an L2 cache whose data and tag arrays are in external DRAM). When there is more than one slave port of a memory box, the accesses to this memory from the multiple ports are kept coherent. The implementation of the memory box can follow a directory-based write-update protocol, directory-based write-invalidate protocol, or a bank-interleaved shared cache organization. As an orthogonal feature, the memory box may include a customized forward address transformation and a customized reverse address transformation, in order to achieve higher spatial locality.

Deciding on the cache parameters: This is a difficult task for a compiler when using only static analysis. However, software profiling feedback about locality of accesses by each memory instruction can be used for determining an initial set of cache parameters (line size, associativity, cache size) for each memory node. Then, using an FPGA prototype of the accelerator hardware with reconfigurable, self-profiling caches (maintaining event counters on each access), a search algorithm may be used for improving the implementation efficiency of each memory node. The search algorithm (e.g., hill climbing for each cache being monitored) will repeatedly execute the following steps: (i) run the application with the current sets of cache parameters, (ii) read, through a scan chain, the event counters in each reconfigurable cache being monitored, and then (iii) decide on the incremental changes for the next sets of cache parameters to try, until a time budget is exhausted, or a performance objective is reached. To save time, the cache parameter space for two sibling nodes in the memory hierarchy tree, can be searched in parallel (although there will be some interaction due to the common parent). As an example, the memory hierarchy tree can be processed in parallel stages, starting from the leaf nodes, followed by the parent nodes whose children are already processed, and so on. The end result will be the best cache parameters found so far for each node in the memory hierarchy.

Effect of memory partitioning on dependence analysis, scheduling, software pipelining and synchronization: Finally, we should describe how memory partitioning impacts dependence analysis, scheduling, software pipelining, and synchronization. For scheduling to work well together with memory partitioning, the region used by memory hierarchy creation is made to agree with the region of scheduling. This region will be a loop invocation (all iterations of a loop), not one particular iteration of a loop. As a special case, the outermost program is treated as the top region. For memories that are local to a inner region, the thread unit responsible for implementing the inner region, first executes the link for the local memory, executes the loop in pipelined fashion, and finally executes an unlink for the local memory (flushes and invalidates the caches associated with the local memory) after the loop invocation is complete. Each instance of an inner loop replica will use a different local memory node, through renaming. Each inner region of an inner region will in turn use the renamed memory of its parent.

Luckily, scheduling, software pipelining and synchronization are not at all affected by memory partitioning. Scheduling, software pipelining and synchronization are done as if the memory were not partitioned at all. The only requirement is that the initial link MEMc=MEMp for a child memory activated within a region should precede all references to MEMc within the region, and the final unlink MEMp=MEMc in a region should follow all references to MEMc within the region.

An example: FIG. 40 through FIG. 45 show an example of how hierarchically partitioned memory is implemented.

-   -   FIG. 40 shows a code example for hierarchical memory         partitioning.     -   FIG. 41 shows the memory address space hierarchy for the code         example: the original code and the code after memories have been         renamed and link and unlink instructions have been inserted.         Notice that it can be inferred that each instance of the A1         memory only needs to retain 3 bits, showing an opportunity for         data width reduction in the implementation. Also in case N is a         power of two, the upper bits of the address are constant bits         (i), which is another opportunity for optimization. The A memory         has unknown width and hence the original 32 bits need to be         kept.     -   FIG. 42 illustrates a memory node implementation with private         coherent caches     -   FIG. 43 illustrates a memory node implementation with shared         bank-interleaved caches     -   FIG. 44 illustrates a memory node implementation also with         shared bank-interleaved caches (with the data array being         external). This setup is usually used for communication with         DRAM as an external data array for a cache.     -   FIG. 45 illustrates an implementation of the memory hierarchy         example. Assuming the loop replication count for the inner j         loop was 2, two copies of the child memory A1, (A1 and A1′) were         created.

2. Relaxing the Requirement for Waiting for a First Complex Instruction to Complete Before a Dependent Second One Starts

Consider a program region C with two inner loops A and B immediately included within C. When an instance of the complex instruction (inner loop) B depends on an instance of a previously executed complex instruction (inner loop) A, in our baseline supercomputer's synchronization algorithm, the given instance of B waits for the activities started by all logically earlier instances of A to quiesce, before B even starts. While quiescence detection is desirable since it requires very little hardware, there is a performance cost for this approach. Assume that an instance of instruction I₂ in the given instance of B depends on an instance of instruction I₁ in the given instance of A, moreover that the dependence edge (instance of I₁, instance of I₂) is on the global critical path of the execution trace for this input to the region C. Making the instance of B wait for the instance of A to complete, lengthens the global critical path (contributes to slowing down the program) by at least the following extra amount of time:

The time between points where I₁ executes and A completes, plus:

The time between the points where B starts and I₂ executes.

However, in some cases the instance of the second complex instruction/region does not need to wait for the instance of the first one to finish entirely. In this section, we will describe four important optimizations, which will be implemented by creating a significant amount of new special purpose hardware for the purpose of achieving inter-thread synchronization, above and beyond quiescence detection. The present section demonstrates the advantages of using specialized hardware circuits for solving difficult problems in automatic parallelization: the synchronization algorithm to be described here would be infeasible using existing microprocessors and software alone. The four optimizations are:

-   -   1. A (the producer thread) can incrementally send         synchronization information (such as the array indices being         accessed by A) to B (the consumer thread). In this manner, B can         begin before A ends.     -   2. It is possible that only a conditionally executed sub-region         B′ within B (and not the rest of B) depends on A. In this case,         B should start without waiting for A to complete, and         synchronization with A should occur only if B′ is actually         executed within B. Such fine grain differentiation among B and         its sub-regions is not possible in the baseline synchronization         algorithm.     -   3. It is possible that B depends only on a conditionally         executed sub-region A′ within A (B does not depend on the rest         of A). In this case, B should wait until all earlier instances         of A′ and ancestor regions of A′ within A are finished. Making B         wait for ancestors of A′ within A is required even if B only         depends on A′ (it is not sufficient to make B wait just for A′),         since while any ancestor region of A′ within A is still running,         A′ might still be (re)executed at any time. But once A′ and all         ancestors of A′ within A are finished (therefore allowing B to         start), if a different sub-region A″ within A, such that A′ is         not reachable from A″, is still running, then A″ should freely         execute concurrently with B, since B does not depend on A″. Such         fine grain differentiation between A and its sub-regions is not         possible in the baseline synchronization algorithm.     -   4. While an instance of B is waiting for a logically earlier         instance of A, it should be possible to start a new instance of         A (if the new instance of A does not in turn depend on B). This         is not possible in our baseline synchronization algorithm, when         using one single quiescence circuit for A, as already described         around the paragraph above beginning with the words “Quiescence         flip-flops have the following problem that we should be aware of         . . . ”.

These four optimizations are in agreement with our spawn-and-forget model of compiler-managed parallelism, which is unstructured compared to co-begin co-end [23], but which forces a thread 2 to wait for a thread 1 only when required by first principles of dependence analysis.

To implement these four optimizations, let us first define a new subclass of dependence. A pair of memory instructions I₁ immediately inside region A and I₂ immediately inside region B (where both I₁ and I₂ access a common data structure) have a train crash dependence, if and only if I₁ and I₂ are dependent in at least one common ancestor region of A and B (i.e., at least one of I₁ and I₂ is a store, and there is an execution of such an ancestor region where an instance of I₁ and an instance of I₂ access the same location), and I₁ in region A accesses addresses within the common data structure using a non-decreasing sequence in a given direction, and I₂ in region B accesses addresses within the common data structure also with a non-decreasing sequence in the same direction. In this context, A is called the producer region and B is called the consumer region.

If the only dependent pair of instructions belonging to the region pair (A,B) is (I₁,I₂), which has a train crash dependence, then the region pair (A,B) is said to have a train crash dependence.

In the synchronization scheme to be described, synchronization is done between pairs or producer and consumer regions, regardless of where the regions are located in the region hierarchy. For every pair of regions (A,B)

-   -   If (A,B) have a train crash dependence, then a train crash         synchronization unit is inserted between all the replicas of A         and all the replicas of B.     -   Else, if there is any dependence between A and B, a         serialization synchronization unit is inserted between all the         replicas of A and all the replicas B.         Considering the remarks about waiting for ancestor regions,         given in optimization number 3 above, finally, for each         dependent pair (A,B) where A and B are not ancestors of each         other, let C be the youngest common ancestor (least upper bound)         region of A and B. For each ancestor A′ of A until but not         including C, a serialization synchronization unit is inserted         between all replicas of A′ and all replicas of B. If there was         already a train crash synchronization unit (A′,B), it is deleted         (converted to a serialization synchronization unit).

A train crash synchronization unit is a kind of network that (i) includes logic in it and (ii) normally does not use FIFO handshaking signals. It operates as follows: it receives producer requests from thread units implementing A (the producers) and consumer requests from thread units implementing B (the consumers), and ensures that no instance of I₂ accessing an address x will execute, until a logically preceding instance of I₁ has already completed an access to an address past x, in the direction of the accesses. In a flat, non-partitioned design, for synchronizing N producer thread unit replicas of region A with M consumer thread unit replicas of region B, the corresponding train crash synchronization unit (A,B) has N producer request slave ports and M consumer request slave ports. Each of the N producer thread units implementing region A have a single producer master port connected to the (A,B) train crash synchronization unit. Each of the M consumer thread units implementing region B have a single consumer slave port connected to the (A,B) train crash synchronization unit. Here is the specification for the producer and consumer requests accepted by a train crash synchronization unit:

-   -   Producer slave port of the train crash synchronization unit:         This port is connected point to point to the corresponding         producer master port of the producer thread unit. A producer         thread unit for region A transmits its global dynamic thread         sequence number, its lower and upper index bounds (index==array         index, equivalent to an address, but with fewer bits), and its         first index into the shared data structure (equal to “minus         infinity,” meaning a new sequence is about to start). The lower         index bound, upper index bound, and dynamic thread sequence         number are saved in registers inside the train crash         synchronization unit. Then, the slave port receives the sequence         of indices accessed by the producer thread within the shared         data structure. Finally the slave port receives the special         index “plus infinity” (meaning the access sequence of the         producer thread is complete). The global dynamic thread sequence         numbers impose a logical execution order on threads, allowing         clear differentiation between past and future threads; these         numbers will be explained around the paragraph below beginning         with the words “For dynamic thread sequence number comparisons,         a global dynamic thread numbering technique is used . . . ”. A         producer thread unit is initially inactive as seen by the         synchronization unit. After the first index of a producer thread         unit's access sequence within a region invocation (minus         infinity) is received, that producer thread unit becomes active         as observed by the train crash synchronization unit. A producer         thread unit becomes inactive again as seen by the train crash         synchronization unit, when the final “plus infinity” is received         from it, meaning this producer thread unit has completed its         current region invocation.         -   The producer slave port sends back an acknowledgement             response to the producer thread unit after a new dynamic             thread sequence number is received, when sufficient time has             elapsed to allow the “minus_infinity” value that starts the             new index sequence to reach all the consumer thread units.             The producer thread unit does not need to stall while             waiting for this acknowledge signal, as explained below in             the race conditions section.     -   Consumer slave port of train crash synchronization unit: This         slave port connects point to point to the consumer master port         of the corresponding consumer thread unit. A consumer thread         unit for region B sends its thread sequence number, and its         lower and upper index bounds to the train crash synchronization         unit. This consumer's dynamic thread sequence number and upper         and lower index bounds are saved in registers within the         synchronization unit. The slave port then sends back a response         which is a non-decreasing sequence of indices starting with the         current minimum index currently being accessed by logically         earlier producers and ends with plus infinity. The current         minimum logically earlier producer index depends on how far         logically earlier producer threads have progressed: it is         non-deterministic, but this non-determinism does not affect         program results. If all logically earlier producer threads are         finished, or there are no logically earlier producers, then a         sequence consisting only of plus infinity is received by the         consumer as the response. In more detail, the response sequence         sent to the consumer is computed as follows:         -   Consider only the active producers             -   i. whose index range overlaps with the consumer's range                 based on the given index bounds (meaning there is a                 potential dependence), and             -   ii. whose dynamic thread sequence number is less than                 the consumer's dynamic thread sequence number (meaning                 the producer is in the past, not the future).         -   At any given cycle, these active producers are accessing             indices in the common data structure in parallel, each with             a non-decreasing sequence that starts with minus infinity.             The dynamic minimum of the current indices being accessed by             all such active producers is computed at each cycle. The             value of this dynamic minimum at each cycle constitutes the             sequence sent to the consumer. The computation of the             dynamic minimum is done with a pipeline whose latency is a             number of cycles, say k. The output of the pipeline reflects             the true dynamic minimum k cycles ago, where k is pipeline             depth. Since the active producer sequences are             non-decreasing, and since no new threads that are logically             earlier than the consumer will appear in the allowed time             windows for observation (see the race conditions section             below), the response sequence sent to the consumer thread             unit is also a non-decreasing sequence ending with plus             infinity. The pipeline for a consumer is a multi-stage tree             of “minimum” operations (each performing min(x,y) on inputs             x and y) whose leaves (inputs) are the current indices             accessed by potential producers and whose root (output) is             the current minimum logically earlier producer index being             fed as input to the consumer. A separate “minimum” tree is             used for each consumer. I.e., the train crash             synchronization unit looks like an N input M output crossbar             switch, constructed with M copies of N input 1 output             multiplexers, except that each multiplexer is replaced by a             pipelined “minimum” computation tree.     -   Consumer master port on consumer thread unit: This port         continuously receives the index sequence representing the         current logically earlier minimum producer index, from the         corresponding consumer slave port on the synchronization unit.         Before making an access to index n within the common data         structure, the consumer thread will wait (the state machine will         freeze) until the current logically earlier minimum producer         index is ahead of n (ahead relative to the direction of the data         structure traversal).     -   Producer master port on the producer thread unit: This port         continuously sends the index sequence for accesses made to         common data structure. An index for an access is sent in the         original sequential program order of the producer, after the         access is completed (after a load response comes back for the         case of a load, and after a store acknowledge is received for         the case of a store). For the case of a sequence of store         indices a separate little FIFO and a separate finite state         machine (index sending engine) handles the waiting for store         acknowledge signals, and the sending of the indices of completed         stores in the original program order. The main finite state         machine of the producer thread unit is not stalled unless the         FIFO for communicating with the index sending engine becomes         full.

Notice that while a consumer thread is monitoring the indices of logically earlier producer threads, a logically later producer thread can be started. This is harmless: logically later producer threads shall not affect the response sequence sent to this consumer thread

FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 show a train crash synchronization unit. FIG. 46 depicts the generation of the index stream being transmitted from producer i, and going to an input leaf node of consumer j's “minimum operation” tree. In more detail, the circuit in FIG. 46 implements the algorithm described above in hardware, as follows:

-   -   If:         -   Consumer j's upper index bound is less than the producer i's             lower index bound (meaning: there is no overlap); or         -   Consumer j's lower index bound is greater than producer i's             upper index bound (again meaning: there is no overlap); or         -   Consumer j's dynamic thread sequence number is less than             producer i's dynamic thread sequence number (meaning:     -   producer i is in the future);     -   Then:         -   There is no dependence between producer i and consumer j;     -   producer i will transmit the constant index “plus infinity” to         consumer j, as if it were inactive;     -   Else:         -   Producer i will transmit the sequence of indices it is             accessing within the common data structure, to consumer j.

FIG. 47 shows the tree of minimum operations, connecting the index streams of all producers (8 in this example) to consumer j. There will be multiple pipeline stages through this circuit by inserting pipeline stage registers (not shown). When there are many outputs of the synchronization unit, additional pipeline stages in the form of a fan-out tree should be added to drive the inputs from the producers to all the separate trees for the outputs going to the consumers. Long wires between thread units and the synchronization unit can also be padded with extra pipeline stage registers to maintain frequency, without harming the semantics of the synchronization circuit.

For dynamic thread sequence number comparisons, a global dynamic thread numbering technique is used, where dynamic thread sequence numbers are conceptually formed of multiple digits separated by dots (where the number of dots is equal to the nesting level of the thread). The thread sequence numbers are compared using lexicographic ordering. The outermost region of the program (the main thread) has sequence number 1. The sub-regions of the top region have thread sequence numbers 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, . . . (these are less than the parent's sequence number 1 in lexicographic order, because a parent thread spawns a child thread and then immediately keeps going. A child thread is therefore logically earlier than the continuation of its parent thread, and should have a dynamic thread sequence number less than its parent thread). The sub-threads of the dynamic sub-thread numbered 0.1 of the main thread are given dynamic thread sequence numbers 0.0.1, 0.0.2, . . . and so on. In general, if a thread has dynamic sequence number

Xn

where X is either empty or is a string ending with a dot, and n is a number, its sub-threads will have the dynamic sequence numbers

Xn′.1, Xn′.2, . . . where n′=n−1

It is not necessary for the sub-threads of a thread to be assigned dynamic thread numbers whose last digit consists of consecutive numbers; this last digit only needs to be positive and increasing. For example the concatenation of the bits (iteration number of loop, reverse post-order number of the inner loop spawning send operation within loop) would also do. When a sub-thread is spawned, the live digits of its dynamic thread sequence number (i.e., the digits required for comparing dynamic thread sequence numbers) should be sent as part of the parameters of the sub-thread.

Not all digits of the entire dynamic thread sequence numbers need to be compared within a train crash synchronization unit, to determine which thread is logically earlier. If one dynamic thread sequence number X is longer than another dynamic thread sequence number Y.Z, where X and Y have the same length (one of the threads is deeper in the region hierarchy), the missing trailing digits of the shorter number X are assumed to be zero, while Z is never all zeros, therefore it suffices to compute Y>=X to infer that Y.Z>X. Also, initial digits that are always identical among the two thread sequence numbers W.X and W.Y (where W emanates from common ancestor regions) can be disregarded: it suffices to compute Y>X to infer that W.Y>W.X.

Between a pair of program regions (A,B) a serialization synchronization unit can be created as a special case of a train crash synchronization unit that does not need to transmit indices continuously from a producer to a consumer: a producer thread forming part of a serialization synchronization, as its first action when its starts, sends its thread sequence number, followed by 0 (“minus infinity” for a null index). It sends 1 (“plus infinity” for a null index) when the producer thread terminates, indicating this producer thread is “done”. The minimum current producer index is computed with a tree of AND gates (“minimum” operations for data width=1 bit). A consumer thread monitors the incoming stream of current “producer done” signals of active producers whose dynamic thread sequence number is less than the consumer, and waits until the incoming value is 1 (all logically preceding dependent threads are complete), before starting. FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 show the hardware for a serializing synchronization unit.

Some optimizations are possible on the train crash synchronization unit:

-   -   If for a given producer-consumer region pair, all producer         thread instances are known at compile time to be logically         earlier than any consumer thread instance, the thread sequence         numbers need not be sent to the train crash synchronization unit         (meaning: all consumers need to synchronize with all active         producers). For example, when the parent thread is not a loop, a         second child thread will always have a dynamic sequence number         greater than the first child thread.     -   If each consumer thread instance is known at compile time to         have an overlapping range with each logically earlier producer         thread (as determined by profiler feedback or static analysis),         i.e., it does not help to again check for actual overlap at         runtime, or if the lower and upper bounds of the address         sequence cannot be determined, then the range checking with         lower and upper bounds can be removed. In this manner, each         consumer thread instance will be assumed to have a potentially         overlapping range with each logically earlier producer instance,         and synchronization will be performed.

When both thread sequence number checks and range checks are eliminated, we are left with simple pipelined “minimum” trees which are identical for each consumer, where each inactive producer transmits “plus infinity” at its leaf node, and each active producer transmits the current index it has just accessed. An important consequence of this optimization is that resources can be shared among the different “minimum” operation trees for each consumer, resulting in very efficient hardware. For example, a 5 producer to 3 consumer train crash synchronization unit with resource sharing, will look exactly like the incomplete butterfly sub-network given in FIG. 7 , where each node of the butterfly sub-network (containing one half of a core crossbar switch) is replaced by “minimum” operation unit followed by a pipeline register stage. There will be no need for the initial fan-out tree pipeline stages.

When a given region Z is a consumer for multiple kinds of producer regions X₁, X₂, . . . , X_(n) with serializing dependences, and Z is also a consumer for multiple producer regions Y₁, Y₂, . . . , Y_(m) with train crash dependences, Z's finite state machine should first wait for each logically earlier producer X, to send “plus infinity” or “done” over the serialization synchronization unit (X_(i),Z). Then, each access by Z to index n within a data structure shared with a producer region Y_(i) should wait until an index greater than n is received from the (Y_(i),Z) train crash synchronization unit. For each producer region, Z should initially send its thread sequence id and other parameters to the appropriate synchronization unit, before waiting for a response.

When the result of a producer region X is used by multiple consumer regions Z₁, Z₂, . . . , Z_(n) with serializing or train-crash dependences, the producer region X transmits multiple sequences of indices starting with minus infinity over separate producer master ports, one producer master port for each consumer region. The thread sequence id, index bounds if applicable, and the minus infinity index value is sent at the beginning of each sequence. During the body of the producer region X's execution, the train crash synchronization signals (current indices) are incrementally sent to connected train crash synchronization units, as accesses are being made to shared data structures. The “plus infinity” index value is sent as the last index of each sequence when X terminates.

Race conditions: A consumer thread instance cannot read a current minimum producer thread index input and perform its next access during a forbidden time window, i.e., until each producer thread instance that is logically earlier than this particular access of the consumer thread instance, has gone through task networks and has reached a producer thread unit, and has started transmitting its current indices, and this transmission has reached the present consumer thread unit. We will accomplish the correct desired behavior and prevent a consumer thread from reading its input during the forbidden windows of time, by slightly modifying the existing quiescence signals. The original quiescence circuit should be kept intact if it is needed for another purpose (the original and modified quiescence detection networks can co-exist).

The original quiescence signal for a leaf region A normally means: all previous instances of A have completed, in other words, either there was no prior instance of A, or all thread units of A are idle, and the task network for A is also empty. To make train crash hazard detection work, we create a new, completely independent modified quiescence circuit, where the only difference is that the “(this unit is) idle” signal from an A producer thread unit that feeds into the quiescence detection network “Qunit” as in FIG. 11 , is replaced by the logical AND of the signals “(this unit is) idle or transmitting,”. one signal for each producer master port of the producer thread unit.

For each producer master port of the producer thread unit, the idle or transmitting signal (implemented as a flip-flop) is defined as follows: At system reset time, the idle or transmitting flip-flop is set to 1. When a producer thread unit receives the parameters of a new loop/region invocation, idle or transmitting is set to 0. Then:

-   -   The producer thread unit sends its thread sequence number, lower         and upper bounds if needed, and the minus infinity index value         to the synchronization unit connected to this producer master         port;     -   The thread unit then keeps going with other operations without         waiting;     -   After enough delay has elapsed, an acknowledge signal arrives         from the synchronization unit to this master port, indicating         that the synchronization unit has received the minus infinity         index value, and sufficient time has elapsed for the signal to         reach all the consumer units. When the acknowledge signal         arrives the idle or transmitting flip flop for this producer         master port is automatically set to 1, without intervention from         the main finite state machine.         Then, as the producer thread is about to end:     -   The producer thread waits for each of its inner regions that are         producers of serializing or train-crash synchronization units,         to reach modified quiescence, by waiting for their modified         quiescence flip-flops to become 1; (to prevent a “glitch” period         where I have ended yet my child has not yet started         transmitting)     -   The producer thread waits until all idle or transmitting flip         flops within this thread are 1, i.e. until acknowledge is         received from each producer master port; (to prevent a late         arriving acknowledge signal from causing an error during the         next loop invocation)     -   Then, for each producer master port the thread unit sends plus         infinity to the corresponding synchronization unit.         Finally the producer thread finishes (starts to wait for the         next region invocation request). At this time all idle or         transmitting flip flops of the thread unit are 1.

The idle or transmitting flip flops will become 0 again when the producer thread unit accepts a new task.

The modified quiescence flip flop is built using the circuits as in the original quiescence flip flop. The definitions above guarantee that when the modified quiescence flip-flop that is associated with sending the request for an inner producer region A is a one, all of the following are true:

-   -   All logically earlier instances of A have either terminated or         have started transmitting on each of the producer master ports         they are connected to.     -   If a logically earlier instance of A spawns its own inner         producer regions, by the time A ends, every instance of these         inner regions will be either be idle or transmitting on each of         their producer master ports. When in turn the inner regions end,         their inner-inner regions that are producers will be idle or         transmitting, and so on. This means when a consumer thread B         depends on both A and an inner region A′ of A, then B will start         receiving the transmission of A′, before the transmission of A         finishes: there will be no “glitch” period between the two         points where A stops transmitting, and A′ starts transmitting,         which might lead B to falsely think it is free to proceed. This         property is important for implementing optimization 3.

Referring to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 , let us start with a simple synthetic example program to show how the optimizations to parallel execution occur based on the principles given above. In the program of FIG. 50 , it is useful to follow this example sequence of events in detail:

• main thread, with dynamic thread sequence number (1), starts • main thread spawns i loop (0.1) • main thread starts waiting for i loop activities to quiesce, using normal (not modified) quiescence • i loop spawns first j loop (0.0.1) at iteration (i=0)   ○ j loop (0.0.1) parameters reach a j-loop thread unit     through the task network, which first sets its idle     or transmitting flip flop to 0. After this j-loop     thread unit's transmission has reached the j-loop->k-     loop synchronization unit and all the k-loop thread     units, the idle or transmitting flip flop of this j-     loop thread unit is set again to 1. • i loop (0.1) spawns a second j loop (0.0.2) at iteration (i=2) after waiting for the first j loop (0.0.1) to reach modified quiescence  ○ The second j loop does not wait for the first j loop     to complete, it starts right after the first j loop     starts transmitting. • i loop (0.1) finishes. • second j loop (0.0.2) spawns a k-loop (0.0.1.1) at iteration (i=2;j=0); there is no wait since this is the first k-loop spawned by this j-loop  ○ Since before j-loop (0.0.2) was started, the i loop    waited for the modified quiescence of the first j-    loop (0.0.1), by the time this k loop (0.0.1.1)    starts, the transmission from the logically ear1ier    first j loop (0.0.1) (i=0) is available to k-loop    (0.0.1.1). Since j-loop (0.0.1) might still issue a    logically ear1ier k-loop, k-loop (0.0.1.1) waits for    j-loop (0.0.1) to complete. It does not wait for the    second j loop (0.0.2) (i=2) since that is not    logically ear1ier. • second j loop (0.0.2) finishes after waiting for its inner k-loop (0.0.1.1) to reach modified quiescence (but no-one will use the transmission from (0.0.1.1)). • first j loop (0.0.1) spawns k loop (0.0.0.1) at iteration (i=0; j=1);  ○ the k-loop (0.0.0.1) just starts, the logically later    (0.0.1.1) k-loop has no effect on it. • first j loop (0.0.1) spawns a second k loop (0.0.0.2) at iteration (i=0;j=2) after waiting for the first k loop (0.0.0.1) to reach modified quiescence;  ○ k loop (0.0.0.2) train-crash synchronizes with    logically ear1ier k loop (0.0.0.1) (not with the    logically later (0.0.1.1)) • first j loop (0.0.1) spawns an 1-loop (0.0.0.3) at iteration (i=0;j=3) • first j loop (0.0.1) waits for all of its inner producer regions to reach modified quiescence (including k loop (0.0.0.2), but not the 1-loop) and then finishes, allowing k loop (0.0.1.1) belonging the second j loop, to proceed  ○ Notice that as seen by k-loop (0.0.1.1) there was    never an incorrect ″glitch″ period between the time j    loop (0.0.1) stopped transmitting and k-loop    (0.0.0.2) started transmitting. The k-loop (0.0.1.1)    now train crash synchronizes with logically ear1ier k    loops (0.0.0.2) and (0.0.0.1). • k loop (0.0.0.1) finishes • k loop (0.0.0.2) finishes • k loop (0.0.1.1) finishes • l loop (0.0.0.3) finishes • main thread finishes

All of the four optimizations, 1,2,3, and 4 were demonstrated in the example above. We identify here how each optimization was demonstrated:

-   -   1. Incremental train crash synchronization occurs between         k-loops, e.g., (0.0.0.1) and (0.0.0.2). The latter k-loop         instance does not wait for the former to complete.     -   2. The second j loop instance (0.0.2) starts immediately after         the first j loop instance (0.0.1) starts transmitting. The         second j loop (0.0.2) really starts waiting for the first j loop         (0.0.1), only when the second j loop issues a k loop (0.0.1.1).     -   3. The first j loop (0.0.1) spawns its inner l-loop (0.0.0.3).         There is no dependence from an/loop to any other loop. The         k-loop (0.0.1.1) does not wait for i-loop (0.0.0.3), since,         unlike j-loop (0.0.1), there is no way the i-loop (0.0.0.3) can         start an activity on which the k-loop (0.0.1.1) depends.     -   4. k-loop (0.0.1.1) is able to start, without disrupting the         observation of k-loop (0.0.0.1) by k-loop (0.0.0.2).

A loop can itself be a consumer of one or more of its inner loops acting as a producer, with a train crash dependence. In this case, before the next element is accessed by the loop, it should wait until all previously issued producer inner loops have already passed that element. The consumer will be logically later than each producer in this case; therefore, thread sequence number checking is not required. The dependence (j loop, i2 loop) within the Eratosthenes's Sieve program (given in FIG. 52 ), is one such example.

FIG. 53 shows the train crash hazards between various loops of the Eratosthenes's Sieve program for finding prime numbers. This is a highly sequential program. We have the following train crash dependence producer-consumer pairs: (i1 loop, i2 loop), (i1 loop, j loop), (j-loop, i2 loop).

FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 show the Bubble Sort program example and a hardware implementation of it using a train crash synchronization unit. Here each instance of the inner loop of the program has a train crash hazard dependence on the previous instance of the same inner loop, since they traverse the array in the same direction. Each inner loop instance is both a consumer of values written by logically earlier inner loops, and is also a producer for logically later inner loops. A consumer inner loop of outer loop iteration i need not wait for the inner loop of outer loop iteration i−1 to finish; it can start as soon as the inner loop of outer loop iteration i−1 has started transmitting to the train crash synchronization unit. While inner loop for outer loop iteration i is consuming the results of the inner loop of outer loop iteration i−1, the inner loop of outer loop iteration i+1 can start consuming the results produced by outer loop iteration i, and outer loop iteration i+2 can start consuming the results produced outer loop iteration i+1. In this setup, the dynamic thread sequence number (in this case, the outer loop iteration number) is important, a consumer inner loop of loop iteration i, should only wait for all logically earlier iterations i−1, i−2 . . . to pass it, it should not wait for future iterations i+1, i+2 . . . . However, all instances of inner loops will have overlapping ranges, and therefore upper and lower bounds checks need not be implemented.

An optimization of a special case of train crash synchronization, where both the producer and consumer access an identical increasing sequence of distinct addresses: when a pair of instructions I₁ (a store) in A and I₂ (a load) in B write the same number of elements using the same increasing sequence of addresses, and A is executed if and only if B is executed, and there is only one replica each of A and B, a FIFO synchronization unit is created connecting A and B, the store I₁ is preceded by a FIFO send of the datum, the load I₂ is replaced by a FIFO receive for the datum. If the common data structure accessed by I₁ and I₂, is not accessed by any other instruction, then the store instruction I₁ can be eliminated as well. A network of signal processing filters can be conveniently created in C++, with this technique. Communication through FIFOs is likely to be more energy-efficient than communication through a memory coherence protocol.

The optimization in the last paragraph can be slightly generalized, to cover the case of a producer loop that writes a sequence of elements of a data structure, but skips some elements (leaves the old value of the element in memory) and a consumer loop that reads the same sequence of elements but skips reading some of the elements. This producer and this consumer loop can still be made to communicate with a FIFO synchronization unit, through a technique called sequence completion. The producer is made to produce all elements of the sequence originally containing skipped elements, by loading the old value of the element from memory and writing it back (therefore sending it to the FIFO), for the case of skipped elements. The consumer is then be made to consume (receive from the FIFO) the entire sequence of elements, discarding elements that were skipped in the original algorithm. For example, for each element 0 . . . N−1−i of the a array, the inner loop of Bubble Sort outer loop iteration i, will either write the element, or leave its old value intact, and then elements 0 . . . N−2−i of array a (one element less than the elements that were produced) will be consumed by the inner loop of iteration i+1 (iteration i+1 will receive but discard the last element of its FIFO input). An unrolled bubble sort outer loop can be implemented with cascaded filters using the technique of the previous paragraph. The first inner loop will read the array a from memory. And the last inner loop within the unrolled loop body will write the array a to memory (and therefore the first inner loop and last inner loop can follow the standard train-crash synchronization technique). FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 demonstrate the Bubble Sort algorithm implemented as cascaded filters.

The FIFO synchronization technique can be used even when the accessed sequence of addresses is not an increasing sequence. Rather, it can be used whenever each address in the given sequence is distinct. For example, when the producer region writes into a[f(i)] and the consumer region reads from a[f(i)] inside loops with index i, where f is any one-to-one function, then a[f(i)] can be sent through a FIFO from the producer to the consumer.

Using a thread sequence number with limited bit width for each digit may lead to more economical hardware. When the last digit n overflows its allotted width while an outer region is about to spawn a sub-thread with dynamic sequence number Xn, an outer region can wait for all logically earlier loops Xk (k<n) any sub-activities started by them (a special synchronization unit is built to accomplish this conditional waiting), and issue the next sub-thread with dynamic thread sequence number X1 instead of Xn.

As an additional optimization, note that in most scientific codes a compiler can determine not only that an instance of a region B depends on logically earlier instance of a region A, but can also determine a dependence distance vector and dependence direction vectors for (A,B). For example, in a program where there in an outer i loop and an inner j loop, the j loop in outer loop iteration i may depend specifically on the inner j loop in iteration i−K, when i>=K. Such specific dependence distances can be used to create a custom thread sequence number comparator in the (j-loop, j-loop) synchronization unit: the consumer j loop depends on the producer j loop only if the thread sequence number of the consumer j loop is exactly are K i-loop iterations ahead of the producer j loop; otherwise the consumer and producer j-loops are independent.

Partitioning train crash synchronization units: As an example, assume we have two producer thread units X0 and X1 and three consumer thread units Y0, Y1, Y2, where as a result of partitioning X0, Y, Y1 are placed in chip 0 and X1, Y2 are placed in chip 1.

To achieve the partitioned design of the train crash synchronization network for connecting all the producers to all the consumers, we can create two partial synchronization units (X0,X1) to Y0, and (X0,X1) to Y1, in chip 0, and a third one, (X0,X1) to Y2 in chip 1. Each of the producer thread units X0, X1, should broadcast its index sequence to all chips where there are consumer units. A partitionable and scalable broadcast circuit can be obtained by modifying a task network in the shape of a 1D torus. To achieve a broadcast function, the partial synchronization unit attached to each node of the 1D torus can simply eavesdrop on the network message and accept the next word of the message, without disrupting the forward progress of the messages through the 1D torus. Just before the message reaches the original node it was sent from, it can be discarded. In the partitioned design, after being delivered to local partial synchronization units on the current chip, the producer index stream should enter the I/O controller on the chip through a FIFO, and should then be delivered to the next chip in Gray count order which has a consumer unit (similar to how messages travel in a partitioned task network). While the inputs and outputs of the train crash synchronization unit are combinatorial wire signals, they need to be converted to FIFO interfaces for the purpose of entering the I/O controller and crossing chips, by using wire-to-FIFO adapters, as mentioned in the description of quiescence detection circuit in APPENDIX C. Normal indices within a producer's index stream could be lost during the wire to FIFO conversion without causing harm, for example if a producer thread accessing elements of an array is already at index 1000, but the message has been delayed because of contention in the I/O controller, it is actually better to tell this fact to the remaining consumer thread units ASAP by not sending 1, 2, 3, . . . , 999 in the sequence, and just sending 1000 instead. But local FIFOs before the I/O controller should be large enough so that important words such as thread sequence number, minus infinity or plus infinity are never lost due to a FIFO full condition (buffer overrun).

3. Compiling Thread Level Speculation into Customized Hardware

The data speculation technique for scalar operands (the ability to reorder memory instructions in a compiler targeting a parallel in-order processor) has been proposed for general purpose processors executing load/store instructions (e.g., [Ebcioglu et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,542,075]; another variant is in the Intel IA-64 processor). Let us quickly review this technique in the context of application-specific finite state machines. For load instructions that are very often not dependent on prior store instructions according to profiling feedback, but that are dependent on prior store instructions according to static dependence analysis, data speculation can be accomplished by first modifying the sequential code as follows, and then performing scheduling/software pipelining and Verilog code generation steps as usual:

//initial sequential code //in this version, load must follow store store q0=ra1,rd1 load rd2=ra2,q0 //load waits for store to quiesce => //speculative version where load can move above store store q0=ra1,rd1 //load_speculative is a normal load, //but does not wait for prior store load_speculative rd2_=ra2 cc1=error_check1(ra1,ra2); //or cc1=error_check2 (ra2,rd2_,q0) if (cc1) { //speculation was erroneous  load rd2=ra2,q0; //nonspeculative store for recovery } else {   rd2=rd2_; // no errors, commit speculative load } //error_check1 is true iff (ra1==ra2). //error_check2 is true iff the contents of the address ra2 is not equal to rd2_. This check is done after the store.

When this code is scheduled, the speculative load will move over the store, as well as additional instructions that depend on the load, leading to a shorter parallel execution. Instructions that depend on the load but are already executed at the time a speculation error is detected, will be re-executed after re-executing the load, as a natural result of normal scheduling.

In the present document, we generalize the data speculation idea to cover not only loads and stores with scalar operands but complex instructions (such as an entire inner loop nest) that may read and write many words within memory. We also apply the idea for creating application-specific hardware from single threaded sequential programs. For example, when an instance of inner region B very often does not depend on logically earlier instances of an inner region A according to profiling feedback, but B depends on A according to static compiler analysis, the following transformation can be done in the sequential code invoking inner regions A and B, before the usual scheduling/software pipelining and Verilog code generation steps:

//Initial sequential code A q=r2 //inner loop A uses and sets MEM, B r1=q //inner loop B uses and sets MEM waits for A => A q=r2 //create new scratch address space for speculation link MEM′=MEM //B_speculative is the same as B, //but uses and sets MEM′ instead of MEM B_speculative r1′=... //verify that all clean, valid bytes of MEM′ //are equal to those of MEM //This check will be executed after A has executed cc1=error_check3(MEM′,MEM,q) if (cc1) { //speculation was incorrect  B r1=q //re-executes B in order, uses and sets MEM  unlink NULL=MEM′ //MEM′ is discarded } else {  unlink MEM=MEM′ //speculation was correct, commit }

Operations that depend on B may also be moved above A (copies will be made for these operations to execute during the recovery code). Atomic and complex instructions (e.g. inner loop nests) that depend on B but are already executed speculatively at the time a speculation error is detected, will be re-executed, as a natural result of normal scheduling. Compared, e.g., to the multiscalar architecture [6] which is a general purpose architecture capable of thread level speculation, selectively compiling hot regions of code to custom hardware with thread level speculation is likely to be more energy efficient and complexity-efficient.

To avoid generation of the recovery code, which can increase code size and hardware area, we can take the following approach in the case misspeculation is very rare: when a misspeculation is detected, an error is raised, the current accelerator results are discarded and the system stops using the accelerator, reverting to software-only execution. A second recompilation of the hardware can generate the recovery code, or alternatively not execute B speculatively before A.

4. Retaining High Frequency in Large Thread Units

Frequency is extremely important in a synchronous design, which the design style chosen by the present preferred embodiment. A component that fails to meet the frequency requirement will slow down an entire chip. Frequency slowdowns can be caused by several factors within a thread unit, and can become exacerbated within large state machines in particular. In case a large finite state machine is generated, the following techniques can be used to address each of these slowdown factors, to retain high frequency and improve performance.

Fanout of state flip-flops and condition registers: state flip-flops are connected to various clock-enable and multiplexer select inputs. This can in general result in a large fanout and long wires in a complex thread unit controlled by a single state machine. One possible solution is to emulate “clustered VLIW” scheduling techniques [33] [34], which are already known for creating schedules for high-frequency general purpose VLIW processors partitioned into clusters, but have not been used for synthesizing application-specific state machines from sequential code. The techniques include:

-   -   Create N approximately equal size clusters, each with its own         identical copy of the finite state machine's state transition         logic. I.e., emit N Verilog state machines instead of one.     -   Assign operations and registers to clusters during scheduling.         Each cluster will execute its own operations (with source         registers only within the cluster) and will set its own         registers.     -   Try to place an operation in a cluster which has one of its         source operands     -   Try to keep a critical dependence cycle of the loop in one         cluster.     -   Try to have a balanced distribution of operations among clusters     -   Add at least one extra delay cycle to cross clusters     -   Always allow at least one extra delay cycle after a compare         operation to allow the condition code to propagate to all         clusters. A local comparison result will be placed in a local         register and then broadcast to the condition register copies in         each state machine in an extra cycle.     -   For one or more memories, each cluster will be connected to its         own private L1 cache copy that uses a write update coherence         protocol to communicate with the corresponding copies in other         clusters.     -   Other slave or master ports to various networks (e.g., inner         loop invocation, division) will not be replicated; they will be         assigned to particular clusters.

Fanout of output_acknowledge: All replicated copies of the state machine should receive the output_acknowledge signal for determining its next state, while sending a request or response. An extra two-element sending FIFO attached to the sending FIFO interface of the finite state machine with a replicated output_acknowledge (FIFO not full) signal, can provide the required drive strength for the fanout.

Fanout of input_request: All replicated copies of the state machine should receive the input_request signal for determining its next state, while receiving a response or a request. Again a small two-element receiving FIFO attached to the receiving FIFO interface of the finite state machine with a replicated input_acknowledge (FIFO not empty) signal, can provide the drive strength.

Big multiplexers: If the same register is set to several distinct expressions in the final tree VLIW code, this will result in a multiplexer with high fan in. This is often the result of register allocation trying to use the same register for unrelated reasons; it is not necessary for performing the function itself. To solve this problem, register coloring should avoid mapping two non-interfering symbolic registers to the same real register if the number of distinct operations being assigned to the real register exceeds a maximum. When this is not sufficient, we can add a one cycle delay after all (or all but one) of the operations the big multiplexer is selecting from; this way, the operations will each set a private local register. The subsequent full cycle will be reserved for the big multiplexer.

Complex logic on output_payload: sometimes when different values are being sent out on the same sending FIFO, depending on the state and condition, instead of the same default condition, this case results on a multiplexer before the output_payload combinatorial output signal. Again, an extra small local sending FIFO attached to the sending FIFO interface of the finite state machine can absorb the potential frequency slowdown.

Inlining simple functional units: Simple operations normally done on networks with a single slave port, such as accessing a memory that became a small SRAM or register array, can be better done internally within the finite state machine as a pipelined multi-cycle operation, without any network handshaking. This can minimize communication between dependent operations and certainly remove the one cycle send and one cycle receive latency that would otherwise be incurred with a network.

5. Meeting Finite Resource Constraints

Reducing hardware resource requirements of a given thread unit: While scheduling the thread unit finite state machine, restrictions can be placed on:

-   -   the number of ports of each kind of network (equal to the         maximum number of parallel network operations of this kind, in a         given cycle),     -   the number of distinct arithmetic, logical or shifting         operations of each kind in a given cycle,     -   the total number of conditional branches in a given cycle         (number of tree VLIW targets-1),     -   the total number of distinct arithmetic, logical or shifting         operations of each kind in the entire region,     -   the total number of registers,     -   Speculation control: disabling code motions that result in         speculative execution     -   Code explosion control: disabling code motions that increase         code size and similar resource-related features, using         scheduling constraints of Enhanced Pipeline Scheduling or any         other scheduling algorithm that is chosen.

Reducing the Number of Thread Units:

A compiler can of course control the number of replicas of each region thread unit in order to reduce the total thread unit count. A more interesting approach is to share hardware resources among thread units where possible.

If there is a bidirectional serializing dependence between two inner loops F and G in a loop, then any replica of F and any replica of G and any replicas of inner-inner loops thereof, will not execute at the same time. Otherwise, it should be assumed that a replica of F and a replica of G may execute at the same time. When inner loops F and G will not execute at the same time, thread units replicas of F and the thread unit replicas of G can share resources by creating a common (F,G) thread unit that can either perform F or G. Thread units of different inner loops F and G that will execute simultaneously can also share resources as a merged (F,G) unit, to improve hardware utilization, if not all threads units for inner loops F and G are busy all the time, due to complex dependences and resource constraints. A task network already provides the required run-time arbitration for a common (F,G) thread unit that will receive simultaneous requests.

Primitive structural transformation for sharing resources among thread units: The key to resource sharing is a primitive structural transformation on the initial flat design produced by hierarchical software pipelining, involving network coalescing and component coalescing, before attaching the flat design to the memory hierarchy. After this step, partitioning and chip unioning can be performed as usual to create the final supercomputer. Referring to FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 , two networks x (where master ports of requesting components of x request the F function and where slave ports of responding components of x perform the F function) and y (where master ports of requesting components of y request the G function and slave ports of responding components of y perform the G function), can be coalesced/made to share resources, by the following technique:

-   -   Change the request and response message of x and y to a uniform         common format, for example, a multi-word message with one bit         opcode field, indicating the F function (if the opcode is 0) or         G function (if the opcode is 1).     -   Create a common responding component (F,G) capable of performing         either the F function or the G function. Since each replica of F         and G have one slave port each, there will be one slave port of         the (F,G) component. The common component waits for a request to         arrive at its slave port and then:         -   If the opcode is 0, it performs the F function and sends             back the F response         -   Else, it performs the G function and sends back the G             response.     -   The (F,G) component will also contain the union of the master         ports of F and the master ports of G, which will be connected to         the same networks they were already connected to. I.e., if F had         m master ports for network w and G had n master ports connected         to the same network w, (F,G) will have max(m,n) master ports         connected to network w.     -   Create a new common network z replacing x and y. Connect the         master ports originally connected to x, and the master ports         originally connected to y, to z. If the same component had a         master port for x and another master port for y, and requests to         the original master ports for x and y were not issued in         parallel, then one master port for z from this component is         sufficient. Create a pool of the common (F,G) components         replacing the original separate F and G components, and connect         the slave port of each (F,G) component to z. For each master         port of the original F or G component connected to a network w,         connect the corresponding master port of (F,G) to same network         w.

Determining the number of common responding components: If F and G are not executed simultaneously, set the number of common responding (F,G) components on the z network to the maximum of the number of F components and the number of G components. If F and G are executed simultaneously, set the number of (F,G) components to the total of the number of F components and the number of G components. The number of (F,G) common components can then be further reduced, by monitoring how busy the common components are through profiling feedback, and recompiling the design.

How to create the common responding components: If F and G are sufficiently similar (e.g., their sequential code control flow graphs have a small minimum edit distance to transform one to the other, after a graph matching), or if both of F and G are small, the common function (F,G) (if opcode==0 then do F else do G) can be synthesized into an FSM as usual. Normal scheduling will try to re-use the hardware functional units between the two functions F and G where possible. Similarity naturally arises, for example, among the k-loop threads connected to different j-loop threads shown in FIG. 15 .

Repeated merging of components with different function may at one point become expensive in terms of total area; in that case, a general-purpose microprocessor can serve as the (F,G) function. This microprocessor only needs to include the functional unit kinds needed by F and G, and its pre-decoded instructions (for performing either the F or G function) can reside in a ROM. The general purpose microprocessor contains the maximum number of each operation that can be executed in a given cycle, unlike the finite state machine, which contains the total number of distinct simple operations a scheduled region. However, a general purpose microprocessor is likely to spend more energy than the finite state machine, and cannot benefit from hardware specialization optimizations (e.g., implementing a shift left by a constant value, as a wire connection).

The instruction set of the general purpose microprocessor will be a standard RISC ISA, with the following notable exceptions. First, a number of quiescence registers will be added to the architecture. For sending requests to an inner region and enforcing dependences, and for receiving requests and sending responses to an outer, parent region, the following send, receive and synchronization/wait instructions also will be added to the architecture. Notice that the microprocessor is pin compatible with a finite state machine, therefore its intended function should be clear from the rest of the present document.

-   -   Send_request q0=network number, internal master port number,         opcode,payload registers     -   Send a request over the specified network and port number for         which no response will be received (the request is for side         effects only).     -   Quiescence register q0 is 1 at reset time. q0 is set to 0 after         sending the request. When q0 becomes 1 again, all activities due         to the request have completed. q0 can be waited on with a wait         instruction.     -   Send_request t0=network number,internal master port number,         payload registers Send a request for which a register response         will be received.     -   t0 is a tag to identify the outstanding request number.     -   If a corresponding receive is executed, it should use this tag,         and should use the same master port of the same network. It is         also possible to send a request speculatively, and not execute         the corresponding receive.     -   Receive response r1=network number, internal master port         number,tag,start bit, width     -   Receives the response with the specified tag and places width         bits beginning with start_bit into r1. Receive instructions for         different fields of the same incoming data should be executed         back to back. They will be executed simultaneously as one         receive operation.     -   Wait q_(i),q_(j), . . . , q_(k)     -   Wait for all the specified quiescence flip-flops to become 1.     -   The set of quiescence registers to wait for is indicated with an         n bit mask in the instruction, where n is the number of total         quiescence registers in the architecture. The assembler will         translate the list of quiescence registers specified by the         programmer into such as mask. The wait instruction can be used         for ensuring that all activities due to previously issued inner         loops are complete, before executing a different dependent inner         loop or memory instruction.     -   Receive_request r1=network number, internal slave port         number,start bit, width Receives the request from the specified         network and slave port number, possibly including the tag and         master port id, and places width bits of the incoming message         beginning with start_bit into r1. Receive instructions for         different fields of the same incoming data should be executed         back to back, these receives will be executed simultaneously as         one receive operation.     -   Send_response network number,internal slave port number, payload         registers     -   Send a response over the specified network and slave port         number, possibly including tag and destination master port         number, if needed.     -   We prefer to handle load/store/update memory instructions with         send and receive instructions as well, for uniformity, although         one could use the traditional load and store instruction formats         as abbreviations of send/receive.

Resource-sharing at the limit yields a compiler-friendly general purpose supercomputer: The resource sharing transformation can be repeatedly applied to pairs of networks, ultimately resulting in a single task network connected to a pool of tree VLIW thread units that can perform any region function within the original system. For additional flexibility, rather than placing the general purpose instructions in a ROM in each thread unit, the instruction cache hierarchy of each general purpose microprocessor/thread unit can be backed by DRAM L2, and instruction lines can be read from the software application memory in the host processor, whenever there is a DRAM L2 cache miss. A general purpose supercomputer is obtained in this case, which is friendly to a parallelizing compiler, supporting hierarchical software pipelining and efficient quiescence detection synchronization. Each thread unit will have one or more ports to the task network, and one or more ports to the memory hierarchy network. For avoiding unneeded coherence activity, a fixed small number of private local memories MEM1, MEM2, . . . , MEMn may also be made available to each processor, along with an ability to execute link MEMi=MEM and unlink MEM=MEMi instructions.

FIG. 60 illustrates the flat design for a general purpose supercomputer with k general purpose processors and m connections to external DRAM units. Just like the special purpose accelerator in FIG. 19 , the general purpose supercomputer communicates with the host processor with the PCI Express connection, and uses the software application memory as the lowest level of its memory hierarchy. After the flat supercomputer design has been partitioned and chip unioning has been done, FIG. 61 illustrates the union chip containing only 8 general purpose processors Proc A . . . Proc H, as well as connections to external DRAM units, and connections to incomplete hypercube links implemented with high speed serial communication devices. The hypercube links allow communication among partitions. As in the case of scalable special purpose accelerators, the configuration SRAM can be modified to make the union chip realize any of the partitions of the flat general-purpose supercomputer design.

6. Generalizing Quiescence Detection to Arbitrary Task Invocation Graphs

We first define a region invocation graph: the vertices of the graph are program regions (loops, begin-end blocks) and there is an edge (x, y) if and only if region x invokes region y.

The transformation of the last section, as a result of creating multi-function merged regions for the purpose of resource sharing, can break the tree organization of region replicas produced by hierarchical software pipelining as shown in FIG. 15 , and lead to an arbitrary region invocation graph. When

-   -   A region A sends a request to invoke a sub-region B, and     -   A needs to detect the quiescence of region B and all of the         sub-regions invoked from it, because a different subregion B_ or         an atomic memory instruction directly contained in A depends on         B; but     -   A does not dominate [35] all sub-regions reachable from B in the         region invocation graph         -   E.g., there is a different region A_ that can invoke a             region C reachable from B, without going through A, as shown             in the following region invocation graph example:

//region invocation graph edges: // (main,A_) , (main, A) main ( ) { ... A_ ( ) ; A ( ) ; ... } //A_, A independent //(A, B), (A,B_) A ( ) { ... B ( ) ;... B_ ( ) ; ... } //B_ waits for B // (B,C) B ( ) {...C ( ); ...} // (A_,C) A_ ( ) { ... C ( ); ...} Then, the simple quiescence detection described in FIG. 12 based on monitoring a spanning tree no longer works: Assume the quiescence detection spanning tree rooted at the A thread unit includes the B and C thread units. An A_ task (working in parallel with an A task) might have spawned a long running C task which keeps sending a “not quiesced” signal up this quiescence detection spanning tree, even though the B tasks spawned by A, and the children C tasks spawned in turn from these B tasks have all completed, causing A to incorrectly think that B has not quiesced, although in fact B and all of its sub-region invocations have quiesced. The incorrect “not quiesced” signal will unnecessarily delay the execution of B which should wait for B to quiesce. As one alternative, we could create different quiescence networks as in FIG. 12 for tasks emanating from A and tasks emanating from A_, using tags throughout the system to differentiate between the tasks initiated by A and the tasks initiated by A_, but here is a simpler solution:

B, just before it is about to end, can first wait for all the sub-region tasks that it has initiated to quiesce, and finally report that it has completed, by sending back a zero-width acknowledge. In turn, A needs to wait until number of requests sent to B equals the number of acknowledges received from B to infer that B has quiesced. In more detail, here is what B needs to do before it ends, in order report quiescence of itself and all its sub-regions:

-   -   Wait until all inner region invocations within B that do not         return a result have quiesced; and     -   Wait until all stores immediately within B have quiesced         (#requests==#acknowledges);     -   Then, send back a zero-width acknowledge response to the region         invoking B (the acknowledge is sent to the master port of the         invoker thread unit, which is known to B), before waiting for         the next input for region B.

The region A, can in turn detect that all prior instances of B and B's sub-regions have completed, by waiting until (#requests==#acknowledges) for the sending FIFO for invoking B. When B invokes a sub-region D: if B dominates all sub-regions reachable from D, then standard quiescence as in FIG. 12 should be used while B waits for D's quiescence. Otherwise D in turn should use generalized quiescence, and B should wait until the (#requests==#acknowledges) for D, to ensure that all its previous invocations of D have quiesced.

Sometimes two different inner loop/sub-region functions will be invoked from the same master port sending FIFO, for resource sharing purposes. The loop may need to know whether all earlier instances of an inner loop quiesced, separately for each different inner loop. In this case, when the zero-width acknowledge is sent back, the opcode of the inner loop being implemented is also sent back. The loop receiving the acknowledge can count the requests and acknowledges for each inner loop function with separate counters attached to the master port, and can therefore determine the quiescence of functionally different inner loops sharing the same master port, separately, and enforce correct dependences between its inner loops.

The generalized quiescence algorithm holds up the thread unit for a loop while waiting for inner loops to quiesce, hence has less potential parallelism than the original quiescence circuit in FIG. 12 . This original quiescence detection circuit implements the true spawn-and-forget model, where a loop can finish without worrying about its inner loops, and then be invoked again, while its previously issued inner loops are still running.

7. Recursive Task Invocation

Although recursive procedures can be converted to iterative loops and handled just like ordinary loops, additional parallelism can be obtained by considering a recursive procedure as a recursively invoked region (i.e. a region invoking one of its ancestor regions). Many common recursive algorithms are in this category, e.g., quicksort, towers of Hanoi, N-queens problem.

Recursion creates a region invocation graph that is cyclic, i.e., not tree shaped. Therefore the generalized quiescence detection technique of the last section can be used, if a recursive function invokes itself a number of times, and should detect the quiescence of these invocations. However, if only the main function needs to know that the top level recursive call has quiesced, the more efficient standard quiescence circuit (shown in FIG. 12 ) should be used, since the main function dominates all recursively invoked regions reachable from the top level recursive call.

Avoiding deadlock: In case a thread unit invocation cycle is created (as in a recursive region hierarchy), then each thread unit on an invocation cycle should be ready for deadlock: with an algorithm with inherently exponential complexity, thread units on an invocation cycle can quickly flood the task networks with many requests, and then will all wait for the clogged network to accept a new request, effectively becoming deadlocked. When the sending FIFO of the master port for sending requests is full and cannot accept new requests, the request that is being sent to the network should be done by the requesting component itself. This is possible, if the component is a general purpose engine, or it is an application specific finite state machine, but the requested function is a recursive call (hence the component can perform the function itself). This approach guarantees forward progress, provided that all the running tasks eventually finish.

As an example, FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 show the algorithm to find the total number of solutions to the recursive N-queens problem and its parallel hardware implementation. Since the queens subroutine does not return a register value, requests to execute it are just sent to the network, and no response is received. Only the top level queensMain region waits for all queens thread units to quiesce. The updates to nS can be done independently and in parallel, for example, by using updating caches only for nS, attached to each queens thread unit [co-pending application Ser. No. 13/156,881 by Kultursay et al.]

We will now provide another recursive sequential algorithm example, which is a harder problem to parallelize: this example is the Alpha-Beta pruning algorithm, an artificial intelligence technique used for playing computer games such as chess. In FIG. 64 we provide the sequential algorithm, and in FIG. 65 we provide its parallel hardware implementation. This variant of the sequential Alpha-Beta pruning algorithm is due to Judea Pearl [36][37]. Here void Node::getChildren(Node[ ] c) is a method that fills the c array with the children nodes (next chess board positions) of the current node (current chess board position). There will be a train crash dependence unit from getChildren which produces the children nodes to the for loop in scout which consumes the children nodes. There will be another train crash synchronization between getChildren and scout, for synchronizing the access to c[0]. getChildren should be thought of as a super-component which will have highly parallel internal structure for a complex game. In this variant of Alpha-Beta pruning, the first child node c[0] of the current node is initially fully evaluated. Then, for each remaining child node, a quick check is made (marked as a “test call” to scout) to see if a better candidate has already been found. Only if the “test call” to scout fails to demonstrate that a better candidate already exists, that child node is fully evaluated with a second, non-test (full) call to scout. If the getChildren method returns the best node first, the “test call” quick check method will in fact result in energy savings, as compared to fully evaluating all children. Notice that if speculative execution were not allowed, this original sequential algorithm would exhibit no parallelism beyond the finding of the next board positions. However, since speculative execution of the scout thread unit is possible (since all stores within scout are to its private memory c), the “test call” of iteration i+1 is executed speculatively by EPS, assuming alpha will not be altered in iteration i. As a result, true parallel execution will occur. But if indeed the test call fails and alpha is altered in iteration i, EPS re-executes iteration i+1 from scratch, starting from the “test call”. Deeper speculative execution of the test calls of iterations i+1, i+2, . . . of the for loop, will result in more parallelism (and more re-executions when necessary). To avoid the long wait times for the result of a scout invocation to come back, the latency tolerance techniques described in optimization 9 can be used, so that multiple virtual scout threads, each with its own registers, and a pointer to its own c memory, share a physical scout thread unit. Speculatively issued invocations of scout should also be canceled when it is known that the speculative invocation is not on the taken path, as discussed in optimization 8.

8. How to Cancel Speculative Complex Instructions that are on the Untaken Path

When a speculative operation is dispatched, it is not known whether the condition to execute the operation in the original sequential code is true or false (let us call this condition the execution predicate of the operation). However, if the inputs for an operation to compute its own execution predicate are sent together with the request, the operation can compute its own execution predicate together with its main computation, and may terminate as soon as the execution predicate turns out to be false, for power savings. The execution predicate can be computed in a separate FSM near the main computation FSM. The main computation FSM can poll the results of the execution predicate FSM periodically, and if the predicate has been determined to be false, can exit early. This is in fact a requirement when the speculative executed complex operation includes a general while loop, since the speculatively executed loop that is not on the taken path, may not terminate, or may take a long time since its loop exit condition is possibly garbage, even though the original program correctly terminates. In case the complex operation normally sends back a response, and just in case the requester of the complex speculative operation waits for its response (due to aggressive speculation), a dummy response is sent back from the canceled operation when it is terminated.

An alternative, more general solution involves creating special hardware for canceling speculative region invocations, when it is discovered that the speculative region invocation is not on the taken path. Dynamic thread sequence numbers (like the ones in optimization 2) can be assigned to threads whenever the depth of thread level parallelism is bounded at compile time (it is bounded even for some recursive procedures). During scheduling, as a send operation is being speculatively moved from a position below one target of a conditional branch to a point above the conditional branch (i.e., at the first point during the upward motion, where the send operation changes from non-speculative to speculative), a cancel operation can be created on the other path of the conditional branch that uses the same unique dynamic thread sequence number as the send. The cancel message will use a separate cancellation broadcast network (e.g., a pipelined ring network going in the reverse direction of the related task network) for sending canceled thread ids. The canceled thread id message will be broadcast within the related task network and thread units. When the incoming canceled thread id is an initial prefix of the running thread's id (meaning this thread is the one being canceled or is a descendant of the thread being canceled), a canceled flip flop inside the thread unit will be set. The main finite state machine of the thread unit will poll this flip-flop, and if it is set, will exit immediately. Task messages belonging to already canceled tasks within task networks will similarly be deleted immediately if a match with the incoming cancellation id is detected. The cancellation message will disappear after it is broadcast to all the required locations.

9. Latency Tolerance Techniques

Finite state machines cannot tolerate unpredictable latencies well. For example, given that the following send-receive command sequence is executed by a finite state machine in the given order:

S_0: send t1=MEM1,op_load, r2 ; goto S_1; //send request 1 for load r1=MEM1[r2] S_1: send t2=MEM2,op_load,r4; goto S_2; //send request 2 for load r3=MEM2[r4] S_2: receive r1=MEM1,t1; goto S_3; //receive response 1 S_3: receive r3=MEM2,t2; goto S_4; //receive response 2

-   -   Even if response 2 is ready before response 1 is, this finite         state machine will still ask for response 1 before response 2,         and will stall until response 1 is ready, leading to poor         resource utilization during the stall period. But the FSM can         make better use of its resources, if for example, it accepts         response 2 first in this case, and executes other operations         that depend on response 2 until response 1 arrives, or if the         FSM works on something completely different until response 1         arrives.

The potential solutions to latency intolerance are well-known in the context of general purpose processors [Barton III et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,761,515] [38], but have not been considered in application-specific finite state machines automatically synthesized from sequential code. We describe below one solution example, that enables very light-weight and energy efficient multithreading on an application-specific finite state machine, to hide the unpredictable latencies due to loads or inner loops.

-   -   The solution example is: keeping more than one identical virtual         FSM thread within the same physical finite state machine, where         each virtual FSM thread has its own set of registers. This         technique will be applied to improve resource utilization in         thread units which incur high load or inner loop/sub-thread         latencies, as determined by profiling feedback. The objective is         achieved by the following technique for converting a single         threaded FSM Verilog code to a multi-threaded FSM Verilog code         with n threads:         -   Each register r in the original single-threaded FSM is             converted to a register ring r₀,r₁, . . . , r_(n−1) in the             corresponding multithreaded FSM, where each r, has the same             size as r. The registers include the “state” register for             controlling the FSM, which also becomes the ring state₀,             state₁, . . . state_(n−1).         -   Each occurrence of a register r read or written in the             original FSM Verilog code is replaced by r₀ in the             multithreaded FSM Verilog code. I.e., the functional units             in the machine, such as adders, will read their input only             from an r₀ within a register ring, and will write only to an             r₀ within a register ring. The multithreaded FSM uses the             state₀ register as its current state. The state transition             logic and FIFO handshaking logic of the FSM are thus shared             among all threads.         -   If a register r is initialized to value N at reset time in             the original FSM, all of the ring registers r₀, . . . ,             r_(n−1) are initialized to N at reset time in the             multithreaded FSM.         -   In each state and condition where the original FSM is             stalled because one or more responses to be received are not             available, in the multithreaded FSM, a thread rotation             r₀<=r₁; r₁<=r₂; . . . r_(n−1)<=(old) r₀ is performed for all             registers r (including “state”), making the next state the             new value of state₀.         -   The tag values for identifying outstanding requests sent to             a network will be shared among all threads. (But the             temporary registers for propagating a tag value from a send             to the corresponding receive are not shared).         -   The sending and receiving FIFOs (pin sets of the Verilog             module) are shared among all threads.

This completes the description of the multithreaded FSM technique. Here is an example scenario, in a multithreaded FSM with two virtual FSM threads, implementing an inner loop that counts the number of elements in a given linked list, as shown in the following C++ code:

struct Node {Node* link; ...}; struct Node* lists[N]; for(int i=0; i<N; ++i) {  int n=0;  for(Node* x=lists[i]; x!=NULL;x=x->link) ++n;  process(n); }

The scheduled version of the inner loop speculatively sends a load request for the next list element before checking if the next element pointer is NULL, so it will always load the contents of the NULL address, which marks the end of a list, speculatively. Here is what happens if the outer loop iterates twice, first with a one element list, and then with a zero element list:

-   -   Thread 0 of the inner loop receives loop invocation request 0         (for counting the number of elements in a 1 element list #0),         sent by the outer loop, and starts working on it, sending out a         load of the first list element with tag 0, and then stalls when         the response for the load with tag 0 is not available at the         expected time, and switches to thread 1;     -   Thread 1 in turn receives a new loop invocation request 1 from         the outer loop (for counting the number of elements of list #1         that has zero elements), and starts working on it, sending out a         speculative load with tag 1, but notices that the list has zero         elements, sends 0 as the response to the parent loop, waits for         a new loop invocation request. Since a new loop invocation         request is not available, thread 1 switches back to thread 0.         The response from the speculative load of NULL with tag 1 is         ignored/discarded.     -   Thread 0 notices that the load response for the load of the         first element of its list (with tag 0) has come back by now.         Thread 0 continues execution sending a speculative load request         for the next element with tag 2, but later notices that its list         had only 1 item, and sends back 1 as the response to the outer         loop. The response for the speculative load of the NULL pointer         with tag 2 will be ignored/discarded. Thread 0 then starts         waiting for a new loop invocation and switches to thread 1,         because no new loop invocation is available.

From this point on the two threads repeatedly switch to each other until a new inner loop invocation comes in.

This technique results in an efficient, light-weight multithreading implementation in a finite state machine. Only one 2 to 1 multiplexer is added to the critical path (r₀ should either receive the result of a functional unit plus possibly an original multiplexer, or receive the value of r₁ in the event of a thread rotation). Creating a multithreading FSM with n virtual threads, is equivalent to creating n replicas of the inner loop as described before, with hierarchical software pipelining. However, both the inner loop replication and the multithreading techniques can be used together. In general, multithreading results in better utilization of resources in applications that incur high load and inner loop latencies, by reducing the idle time of finite state machines.

As an energy saving optimization, when it is detected that all threads are currently stalled after back to back thread rotations equal to the number of threads, the finite state machine can save the present state, and enter a “sleep” state. This way, continuous thread rotation can be disabled until at least one new input arrives into a receiving FIFO, in which case the main FSM is resumed at the saved state. When in the sleep mode, it will take one extra cycle to get out of sleep mode and respond to an input request.

When n, the number of threads, is large, only r₀, r₁ and r_(n−1) need to be cached in registers, and a one read-port and one write-port n-element SRAM named R can be used instead of the remaining registers of the ring, where R[0], R[1], . . . ,R[n−1] represent the home locations of register r for threads 0, 1, . . . , n−1, respectively. In this case, the parallel actions to be performed to accomplish a thread rotation are:

-   -   r₀<=r₁;     -   r₁<=R[r_read_addr];     -   r_read_addr<=(r_read_addr==n−1?0:r_read_addr+1);     -   R[r_write_addr]<=r_(n−1);     -   r_write_addr<=(r_write_addr==n−1?0:r_write_addr+1);     -   r_(n−1)<=(old) r₀;

Here, initially, at reset time:

-   -   r₀, r₁, R[2], R[3], . . . , R[n−2], r_(n−1) have all been set to         the initial value of register r, and     -   r_read_addr=2; r_write_addr=n−1.

10. Automatic Hardware-Software Partitioning

To be able to automatically identify the part of the software to be converted to hardware, the present document uses profiling-directed feedback, as well as a hypergraph partitioning algorithm such that:

-   -   The time spent in the hardware part covers a large percentage of         the total execution time;     -   The hardware part does not exceed an estimated hardware resource         limit; and     -   Communication between hardware and software is reduced.

The algorithm performs unconstrained partial inlining of basic blocks selected from multiple procedures in different files, including libraries, and finally creates one or more code fragments that look like single-entry single-exit sequential procedures. Standard compiler processing and scheduling can then be performed in these code fragments.

An interesting consequence of omitting basic blocks that are never or infrequently executed is that code that prevents two regions from executing together can sometimes be removed, resulting in better parallelism. If indeed the omitted basic block is executed on some unexpected program input, the parallelized hardware code will exit to software first, execute the omitted basic block in software, and will re-enter the parallelized hardware code at the next entry point.

APPENDIX I describes the hardware-software partitioning algorithm in detail.

11. Hardware Acceleration of Parallel Software

In the section above on the overall application-specific supercomputer system, around the paragraph beginning with the words “The supercomputer generated by the present document's method acts as a coprocessor . . . ”, we described the entire application-specific supercomputer as a co-processor of a single uniprocessor. This approach offers the conceptual advantage of the single-threaded sequential programming paradigm.

However, a large body of hand-parallelized applications already exists, and new hand-parallelized applications are being developed as well. For compatibility with existing or new hand-parallelized software, the method of the present document can also be applied to accelerate parallel applications that involve multiple general-purpose microprocessors. One example is a set of general-purpose microprocessors using the popular communication protocol MPI (Message Passing Interface) among them. In this case, a separate coprocessor can be generated for each processor (=MPI process) in the parallel application. The communication functions in the original program remain in the accelerated software program and are executed by the host processors, while the most time consuming parts executed in each processor, typically the main sequential computation, are accelerated using the corresponding coprocessor.

A faster alternative for the idea in the last paragraph is to create a new scalable hardware network spanning all the coprocessors, and to also map critical parts of an optimized software implementation of MPI using the said network, to each of the coprocessors. In this case, low-level MPI communication primitives will be performed only by a coprocessor (not the standard host processor). The most critical sequential computation of each MPI process, as well as the most critical MPI communication operations will be accelerated with application-specific hardware. A natural way to create a scalable (possibly incomplete) hypercube network spanning all of the co-processors is to add extra hypercube communication links to the existing (possibly incomplete) hypercube network within a coprocessor, where the extra links are reserved for MPI communication only.

Another example of supporting hand-parallelized software with the present document's method is to create an optimized new implementation of a parallel programming language with explicit thread level parallelism, such as Cilk [39]. The user can identify a set of subroutines within the parallel language program to be mapped into application-specific hardware. Capabilities of a thread-level parallel language, such as spawning a subroutine (meaning: sending a region invocation request to a task network) and waiting for completion of previously spawned parallel activities (meaning: waiting for the all of a set of quiescence flip-flops set by prior send operations to become one) are already some of the native capabilities of the compiler-generated finite state machines of the present document. Thus, instead of letting the compiler discover correct parallelism and enforce synchronization within single-threaded sequential code automatically, users can create the thread-level parallelism manually using parallel language constructs (in which case the burden of correct parallel coding is on the user). The thread level parallel language could also be extended to use features presented in the present document, such as train-crash synchronization units. The present document's method will also enable the serial code fragments within a single thread of the user's code to be automatically converted into parallel application-specific hardware.

12. Achieving Precise Exceptions in an Application-Specific Hardware Accelerator with Hierarchical Software Pipelining

In a general-purpose processor supporting the precise exceptions feature, when an exception occurs just before the n′th dynamic instruction in an execution trace starting from a given input state, an interrupt handling routine observes that:

-   -   All instructions before dynamic instruction n have executed; and     -   The n′th and following dynamic instructions have not executed at         all; and     -   The program counter contains the instruction address of the n′th         dynamic instruction.

Achieving the precise exceptions feature becomes increasingly difficult as the parallelism of a microprocessor implementation increases. However, the precise exceptions feature within a new general purpose binary translation target architecture is very useful, since it enables all old code to run on the new architecture, including legacy assembly code software, or low-level operating system assembly codes. Achieving precise exceptions within the scheduled code generated by an optimizing compiler is well-known when targeting general purpose VLIW processors using static binary translation [40] or dynamic binary translation ([41] [42] [Cmelik et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,031,992]). However, when the binary translation target is a co-processor achieving precise exceptions is more difficult, since for example the main microprocessor gets the external and timer interrupts, as opposed to the co-processor. In the present document, we focus on:

-   -   Achieving precise exceptions in an energy-efficient way when the         binary translation target is a customized application-specific         hardware accelerator (separate from a host microprocessor); and     -   Achieving precise exceptions in the context of the hierarchical         software pipelining method of the present document, which has         deeply nested thread-level parallelism, unlike prior compiler         techniques.

Adding the precise exceptions feature to the present document allows the construction of a static binary translation system [40] (where all profiling directed feedback is obtained offline and where there is no runtime translation software, unlike dynamic binary translation, where translation is done on-the-fly.). Static binary translation is simpler than dynamic binary translation, and is particularly appropriate for an optimized application-specific accelerator made out of an ASIC chip, which cannot be changed.

To achieve precise exceptions within the hierarchical software pipelining algorithm of the present document, here is what needs to be done. In the initial sequential code before even loop and region identification begins, it suffices to insert the following code before each instruction that might cause an exception, and then perform scheduling, software pipelining and Verilog code generation on this sequential code as usual:

-   -   Check if the next instruction will cause an exception;     -   If indeed the next instruction will cause an exception:         -   Set the program counter register to the original address of             the next instruction in the microprocessor object code;         -   Exit from the hardware-accelerated program fragment and             return to software execution at the next instruction.             -   All architected registers of the host microprocessor                 should be live at the point of the transition from                 hardware back to the software

For example, a precise divide by zero exception involving an unsigned integer division instruction r3=r1/r2 can be created by starting from the following sequential code, and scheduling the sequential code as usual:

cc1=(r2==0); if (!cc1) goto L1 //DIVIDE_INSTR_ADDR==original software addr program_counter=DIVIDE_INSTR_ADDR; goto overallReturn L1: r3=r1/r2; ... overallReturn:( all registers are live here) //exit and go back to software at program_counter

-   -   If the divisor r2 is zero at runtime:         -   The hardware-accelerated program fragment will exit to the             software, with the program counter equal to the original             unsigned divide instruction address, and with all             microprocessor registers having the correct values just             before the divide instruction;     -   Else (if the divisor r2 is not zero at runtime):         -   The hardware will continue execution of the normal function             of the program fragment, with high parallelism, as usual.

Page faults, and memory read and write protection exceptions can be emulated in a hardware accelerator as follows:

-   -   Let there be an extra bit called “inaccessible” in the tag of         each line of the caches in the entire supercomputer system.     -   When the accelerator memory hierarchy requests a line from the         host microprocessor that is not accessible, the host         microprocessor will return a line with the “inaccessible” bit         set.     -   Then, before the point where a load or store is committed, the         sequential code to be converted to hardware will test the         addressed line for being inaccessible, by making an extra memory         read access in the accelerator memory hierarchy, or by checking         a flag set by an earlier access to the same operand.     -   If the line is inaccessible:         -   The sequential code will return to software execution             immediately, with the program counter equal to the address             of the offending load or store and with the general             registers having the correct values just before the load or             store.         -   The host microprocessor will in turn incur the page fault             exception or memory protection exception when it tries to             re-execute the offending load or store.     -   Else (if the line is accessible)         -   Parallel execution by hardware will continue.

During scheduling, the check for accessibility of the line should be made at the point where a load is committed, not when the load is speculatively executed. If the speculative load is on an untaken path, it is quite acceptable for it to read inaccessible lines.

Here is an example of how a page fault or a divide by zero exception is reported to the host as a precise exception, in the context of thread level parallelism generated by hierarchical software pipelining. Note that each loop containing a potentially exception-causing instruction returns:

-   -   A condition code which indicates if an exception occurred during         loop execution,     -   The program counter and the register state to resume execution         at, in case the exception occurred.

Notice that an outer loop will check if any of its inner loops reported an exception, and if so, will immediately exit itself. There can be nested pipeline parallelism, e.g., inner loops belonging to iteration n+1, n+2, . . . of an outer loop may already be issued, before a response is received from an inner loop issued in iteration n of the outer loop. However, responses from inner loops will be received in the original program order, and the exceptions will be checked in the original program order, in which case, for example, an exception that occurs during the inner loop invocation within outer loop iteration n will be reported (along with the register values and program counter) before any exception that occurs in iteration n+1, n+2, . . . of the outer loop. This the correct behavior required by the sequential single-threaded software semantics.

External I/O or timer interrupts can be implemented as follows, in the context of deeply nested thread level parallelism:

-   -   1. The accelerator does not get the external interrupts, the         host microprocessor does.     -   2. As the host microprocessor enters an accelerated code         fragment region and starts exchanging messages with the hardware         accelerator, external interrupts will be disabled in the         microprocessor. However, the microprocessor will be able to         check if there is a pending external interrupt while this         interrupt is disabled. On each iteration of the host-accelerator         message exchange loop, the host microprocessor will check if         there is a pending external interrupt, and if so, the host         microprocessor will send an “external interrupt” message to the         accelerator, which sets an external interrupt flag. The host         microprocessor will then just continue the ongoing message         exchange.     -   3. The sequential code to be scheduled/software         pipelined/converted to Verilog will check the external interrupt         flag at the top of each loop in the sequential program, and if         so, will return to the software execution with the program         counter pointing to the loop header instruction, as if a precise         exception occurred there.     -   4. In the parallel hardware corresponding to the sequential         code, the external interrupt message from the host         microprocessor will set an “external interrupt flip-flop” in         partition 0/chip 0 of the accelerator; and the value change of         this flip-flop will be propagated to copies of the same         flip-flop in all other partitions (similar to how quiescence         signals are propagated from chip to chip) and will in turn will         be propagated to all finite state machines within the partition,         with a flip-flop tree.     -   5. Each currently running finite state machine inside the entire         accelerator will test the local external interrupt flip-flop         each time its loop header instruction is committed, and if the         flip-flop is set, will immediately exit the loop with the         program counter equal to the loop header instruction, and the         microprocessor registers equal to their values just before the         loop header instruction.     -   6. Since each outer loop checks the results of its inner loops         in the original program order, the external interrupt will be         detected as a precise exception at the first loop header         instruction in the original program order, where the local         external interrupt flip-flop was found to be true.     -   7. The software application running on the host, upon receiving         the resume request reg1, reg2, . . . message from the         accelerator, will restart the program at the given register         state and loop header instruction, while re-enabling exceptions.     -   8. Thus, the pending external interrupt will finally occur at         the precise loop header instruction boundary in the host         microprocessor.

The external interrupt latency from the time the external interrupt request is received by the microprocessor to the time the interrupt occurs at the loop header instruction in the microprocessor is equal to the time for executing the longest loop body in the accelerated code fragment, plus a round-trip through the supercomputer at about the speed of light, plus various additional communication delays.

Once software execution is resumed abruptly in the middle of an accelerated code fragment, as a result of an external interrupt or exception, the software in turn will invoke the accelerator at the next accelerated code entry point.

There is a hardware cost to providing precise exceptions, namely, each thread unit returns a larger message, containing all the microprocessor registers and a program counter. Also, precise exceptions will lead to increased code and increased hardware area.

13. Memory Mapped I/O Accesses, Sequential Memory Consistency, Volatile Variables and Kernel Code Execution

It will be seen that parallelizing a single-threaded application as described in the present document is simpler than building and programming a multi-processor system with sequential memory consistency. Also, allowing a hardware-accelerated user application access a dedicated port of a fast network directly (without going through an OS) is a better way to do I/O. However, for the purpose of protecting customers' investments in existing software, the present section describes how to make an application-specific accelerator remain compatible with an existing multiprocessor system running a traditional OS, with sequential consistency and memory mapped I/O capabilities.

The accelerator acts as co-processor to the host microprocessor in the present preferred embodiment, with a separate memory hierarchy. The separate memory hierarchy makes the implementation of memory mapped I/O and sequential multiprocessor consistency problems a little more difficult than integrated systems considered in the past [41] which used a single memory.

I/O accesses:

-   -   The hardware accelerator does not perform memory mapped I/O         space accesses, only the host microprocessor does.     -   The host-accelerator messaging mechanism will be able to probe         and find out if the addressed line is in I/O space without         actually performing the I/O access, and will send back an         “inaccessible line” to the accelerator, if indeed the line is in         the I/O space.     -   Speculative loads to I/O space that are not on the taken path,         are harmless, but if a load or store to I/O space is committed         in the accelerator, the hardware accelerator will recognize it         as accessing an inaccessible line, and exit to software as if it         had a page fault precise exception, and re-execute the I/O space         access on the host microprocessor.     -   If the compiler knows ahead of time that a load or store         accesses I/O space, then the code fragment containing the         load/store should not be converted to hardware.

Sequential memory consistency with multiple host processors: An accelerator's job is to be functionally equivalent to a single threaded code fragment. Thus, the accelerator considers it safe to load memory lines into a cache in the accelerator, do the most aggressive reordering of memory operations consistent with single threaded execution, and finally write back the changed memory locations back to the host processor memory. But then, consider a sequential multiprocessor memory consistency test such as Dekker's test:

Microprocessor 1: store X load Y Microprocessor 2 (with accelerator): store Y load X

In this test, by examining all possible interleaved orderings of accesses from the two microprocessors, one can see that it should not be the case that microprocessor 1 loads the old Y, and microprocessor 2 loads the old X. But here is a sequence that fails this test when microprocessor 2 uses an accelerator:

-   -   Microprocessor 2 starts the accelerator. Seeing that the         addresses of X and Y are different, the accelerator loads the         old value of X first into its cache (since this is legal in a         single thread),     -   The non-accelerated microprocessor 1 stores X into system memory         (having no effect on the accelerator's cached value of X),     -   The non-accelerated microprocessor 1 loads the old value of Y         from system memory, and finally     -   The accelerator stores the new value of Y into its cache and         then flushes Y to the system memory.     -   Therefore both microprocessors will appear to have loaded the         old values of X and Y, which is incorrect for this test.

One solution is to run the accelerator using a transactional memory feature in the host processor, and only if the bytes read by the accelerator from the host memory have not been changed by other processors during the execution of the accelerated code fragment, commit the changes made by the accelerator, and to otherwise reject/roll-back the changes and re-execute the accelerated code fragment in software. This solution is acceptable if roll-back occurs very infrequently. Another solution is to connect the memory system of the accelerator and the two microprocessors to the same coherent memory hierarchy (described in the APPENDIX E of this document, for example), and in the accelerator, verify that the speculatively loaded value has not been changed each time any load that has been moved above a prior load or prior store is committed by the accelerator. In this example sequence above, when the load X is committed in the accelerator, the accelerator will observe that X has changed, and re-execute the load X and all other operations that depended on the load X, and that were already executed, through its pre-compiled recovery code.

Volatile variables: In case the compiler passes information about variables that were declared volatile in the C/C++ source code to the scheduler, one solution is to make accesses to volatile variables un-cached accesses directly to the system memory and not reorder these accesses. Host synchronization operations such as compare-and-swap, test and set, and any memory instructions that lock the memory bus of a microprocessor, can also be executed by the host microprocessor, assuming the relevant variables were properly declared volatile in the C++ code. If the host microprocessor has weak memory consistency, accesses to volatile variables can be followed by memory barrier instructions. This is easier than implementing sequentially consistent memory, although slower, because re-ordering is inhibited.

OS kernel code execution: The computation part of an operating system kernel code fragment can be accelerated equally well on application-specific hardware. For example a kernel code fragment accessing memory only in real address mode from beginning to end, can be implemented in an application-specific accelerator, by letting the message exchange mechanism access lines in real address mode. Privileged operations of the kernel will still need to be done in the host microprocessor: the present accelerator model only performs normal arithmetic and logical operations and memory accesses without I/O side effects. The message access mechanism should run with kernel memory access privileges if invoked from kernel code, and with user memory access privileges if invoked from user code.

14. Using the Present Document's Method for Designing Traditional Hardware Components

To create a hardware component from single-threaded sequential code, we should have a way to specify the hardware component pinout, and we should have a means of communicating with the component's pins within the sequential code. A single-threaded sequential code fragment written in a language such as C++ does not have a native means of specifying the pins of a hardware component, nor does it have a means to accomplish communication with the pins. The supercomputer system created by the present document's method does have a pin specification for communicating with the host microprocessor, but these are default pins; the programmer does not have control over them. For creating a proper hardware component, the programmer should be able to explicitly specify the component pins.

In this section we describe a different application of the present document's method, that of generating a parallel hardware component at the Register Transfer Level from untimed, behavioral C++. We use the SystemC “module” abstraction for the purpose of specifying the component pinout, and we use FIFO primitives to make the C++ code communicate with the component pins. Since the present document's compilation system is based on sending and receiving FIFO interfaces, the hardware component will also use these same standard interfaces through a simple extension of the SystemC sc_fifo class, called ez_fifo, which is downward compatible with sc_fifo. A key difference in ez_fifo is that a write(object) method for sending a message to a FIFO is not a void method, as in sc_fifo. The write method returns a dummy result, so that other FIFO operations that should be done after this write/send operation are made clear to the compiler by making them use the dummy result (the compiler will otherwise freely re-order operations subject to dependences in the C++ program and available resources only). The compiler will simply schedule an ez_fifo write method as a hardware FIFO send primitive and an ez_fifo read method as one or more hardware FIFO receive primitives. Checking if an input FIFO is not empty, can be accomplished by testing the corresponding input_request input signal of the top region finite state machine, and checking if an output FIFO is not full, can be implemented by testing the corresponding output_acknowledge input signal of the top region finite state machine. Non-blocking FIFO reads and FIFO writes can be constructed from these primitives in turn. All of the techniques in the present document's method are available for creating the internals of the hardware component, such as hierarchical software pipelining, and customized memory partitioning.

Here is the behavioral, untimed SystemC paradigm for creating a pipelined filter that, if dependences and resources permit, receives a request every cycle and returns a response every cycle in its steady state, with a latency of, say k cycles, between a request and the corresponding response. The code specifying the functional behavior of the filter can be any C++ code, as long as it only uses local, lexically scoped variables.

# include systemc.h> # include <ez_fifo.h> ... class Response {...};//the fields of a response class Request {...};//the fields of a request class State {...};//the internal state SC_MODULE(myFilter) { public:  //slave port  ez_fifo_in<Request> in;//receiving FIFO  ez_fifo_out<Response> out;//sending FIFO  SC_CTOR(my_fliter) {   SC_THREAD(main);  }  static boost::tuple<State,Response> process(   const State& state,   const Request& req) {.../*the filter function*/}  void main( ) {   State state; //initial state   //compute the next state and response message   //for each incoming request   while (true) {    const Request req=in.read( );    Response resp;    tie(state,resp)=process(state,req);    out.write(resp);   }  } };

If, on the other hand, the main filter loop code were written as:

//zero-width dummy variable //for making in.read occur after //the prior iteration's out.write Int0 dummy; while (true) {  const Request req=in.read(dummy);  Response resp;  tie(state,resp)=process(state,req);  dummy=out.write(resp); }

-   -   An entirely different non-pipelined filter would be created,         that reads the first input, processes it in k cycles, and sends         back the result, then reads the second input, processes it in         another k cycles, and sends back the result, and so on. Without         dummy variables, the compiler will move the FIFO read from the         n+1st iteration above the FIFO write of the n′th iteration, and         will even execute FIFO read and FIFO write operations         speculatively. The dummy dependence variables make it possible         for a user to tell the compiler exactly what the required         dependences are, and to control the parallelism.

The standard implied message communication between the application-specific supercomputer and the host microprocessor should be avoided altogether, so that the user obtains a top level Verilog module with only the FIFO I/O pins specified in the SystemC code. If only lexically scoped variables are used in the main( ) thread subroutine and its subroutines in turn, this objective is accomplished, by avoiding each possible message as follows:

-   -   Initial resume_response reg1, reg2, . . . message from host to         accelerator: The initial registers (registers that are live at         the beginning of the code fragment main) are not needed, and         therefore this message is not needed. The hardware can create a         suitable value for the stack pointer all by itself, and map the         stack area to its own local memory     -   Line read and line flush messages from accelerator to host: The         line reads from and line flushes to the software application         address space will not occur since all data structures are         local. Therefore, these messages are not needed.     -   Final resume_request reg1, reg2, . . . message from accelerator         to host: Since the hardware component is intended to run forever         in a system, through FIFO communication only, the final         registers need not be sent back to the software application.         Therefore this message is not needed either.     -   Therefore, all the standard host-accelerator messaging will be         eliminated from the top level Verilog module defining the         component, leaving only the user-declared FIFO interface I/O         pins there.

For each receiving (sending) FIFO I/O pin set of the SystemC module, a receiving (sending) hardware FIFO interface is created at the top level Verilog module enclosing the component, with a payload width specified by the user, via the declaration of the class instance that is being communicated in this FIFO. Using parameters in the class constructor for a FIFO, different kinds of hardware FIFOs can be created, for example:

-   -   Single wide word versus variable length M-bit narrow-word         messages. Variable length messages can be obtained by adding a         wide to narrow FIFO converter for a sending FIFO, and adding a         narrow to wide FIFO converter for a receiving FIFO.     -   A set of sending/receiving pairs of FIFOs, representing either         slave ports or master ports following the network interface         conventions as described in the present document.

When the component to be created is interfacing with only standard FIFO interfaces defined in this document with blocking reads and writes, then, the interfaces will be perfectly matched, and the precise timing of events will not matter as long as dependences are respected in the ordering of events. Either the sender or receiver component of a FIFO interface can pause for an arbitrary number of cycles at an arbitrary time, by setting the appropriate input_request or output_acknowledge signal to 0. But timing does matter, for example, when interfacing with an existing hand-designed hardware component that does not comply with any FIFO interface. To ensure that a receive or send operation occurs at least m cycles after a prior send or receive, and occurs and at most n cycles after a prior send or receive, minimum and maximum latencies can be declared for each (possibly dummy) output variables of a software fifo send or receive in the software program. For instance, once a DDR2 dynamic RAM interface receives a write command, the first byte to be written should appear on the DQ bus exactly K cycles later, where K is an initial configuration parameter of the DDR2 chips, and the rest of the bytes should appear on the DQ bus back to back thereafter, without any pauses whatsoever. This can be ensured by making the sending of the first byte depend on the sending of the write command with exactly K cycle latency (making the second send depend on the first with a dummy variable, using a declared latency), and making the sending of the 2nd byte depend on the sending of the 1st byte with exactly 1 cycle latency, and so on. Scheduling with both minimum and maximum latency requirements is known in the literature of microprogramming and microcode scheduling, for example, [43].

Armed with exact latency control over send and receive operations, a compiler generated module can also safely interface with combinatorial inputs and outputs of existing hardware systems, that lack the FIFO handshaking signals input_request and output_acknowledge (by tying output_acknowledge input permanently to 1 and using output_payload as a combinatorial output, or tying input_request input permanently to 1, and using input_payload as a combinatorial input).

When performing mixed SystemC simulation, with a designated module running on an FPGA, and the rest of the system remaining in SystemC software, a SystemC software glue code capable of communicating with the FPGA replaces the original SystemC module. The glue software module repeatedly executes the following actions;

-   -   If any SystemC software receiving FIFO of the original software         module has a pending message, read it and forward it the correct         hardware receiving FIFO.     -   If a message has arrived from a hardware sending FIFO, forward         it to the correct SystemC software sending FIFO of the original         software module.

The technique of the present section just needs a way to specify component pins, i.e., any precise contract between the sequential code programmer and the compiler on defining the component pins and on communicating with these pins. It does not require SystemC specifically. As one example, in order to specify the component pinout using C++ only, without SystemC, specific arrays of structures can be identified as component pins, for example by making them reference parameters of a subroutine whose name has a special prefix known to the compiler. These arrays will either be read sequentially or written sequentially, they will never be accessed in any other way.

-   -   Blocking write to a FIFO: This is accomplished by writing to the         next element of a write-only array of structures designated as         an output FIFO pin set. It is translated to a hardware send         operation within the finite state machine.     -   Blocking read from a FIFO: this is accomplished by reading the         next element of a read-only array of structures designated as an         input FIFO pin set. This is translated to a set of hardware         receive operations within the finite state machine.     -   Non-blocking read from a FIFO: This can be accomplished by         creating a second read-only array of Boolean bits indicating if         an input FIFO is not empty and checking if the next element of         the Boolean array is true, before reading the next element of a         the read-only array of structures designated as an input FIFO.         Testing the next element of the special Boolean array is         translated to testing input_request as the finite state machine         communicates with the corresponding input FIFO.     -   Non-blocking write to a FIFO: this can be accomplished by         creating a second read-only array of Boolean bits indicating if         an output FIFO is full, and checking if the next element of the         Boolean array is true, before writing the next element of the         write-only array of structures designated as an output FIFO.         Testing the next element of the special Boolean array is         translated to testing output_acknowledge as the finite state         machine communicates with the corresponding output FIFO.     -   The component test bench should be written and random test         vectors should be generated using pure sequential C++ in this         case.

APPENDICES Appendix A. Incomplete Butterfly Sub-Network

Here are more details of the design of an incomplete butterfly sub-network (butterfly switch) with nInputs input ports (receiving FIFO interfaces) and nOutputs output ports (sending FIFO interfaces).

We will use low-endian notation throughout this document. I.e., bit 0 of an N-bit word is its least significant bit; bit N−1 is its most significant bit.

The butterfly sub-network is constructed from simple high frequency 2 input 2 output core crossbar switches. The core crossbar switch has two receiving FIFO interfaces, and two sending FIFO interfaces, each with the width of a word (where the width of a word is a parameter). The incoming and outgoing messages are variable length multi-word messages, where the most significant bit of a word (called the end-of-data bit) indicates the last word of a multiword message, when it is 1. A specified destination port address bit (with the bit position known at compile time and specified as a parameter) in the first word of an input message coming to the core crossbar switch, indicates which output port (0 or 1) of the core crossbar switch this message should go to. Messages can be received from any receiving FIFO interface, and routed to any sending FIFO interface of the core crossbar switch.

At each output port of the core crossbar switch, there is a small FIFO with two elements made of flip-flops, carefully designed for high frequency operation, allowing simultaneous accesses at both ends of the FIFO. The FIFO is full if it has two elements. The FIFO is empty when it has zero elements. For transferring data from an input to an output, the core crossbar switch only checks that an output small FIFO is not full and a prior stage FIFO is not empty, both of which are local signals, not dependent on any further core crossbar switches elsewhere in the butterfly sub-network. This locality property is important for achieving a faster cycle time.

Even though the commonly used core crossbar switch has 2 inputs and 2 outputs, we will describe a more general core crossbar switch with nI>=1 inputs and nO>=1 outputs, so that the technique for creating a crossbar switch other than a 2 to 2 switch, such as a 2 to 1 switch, 1 to 2 switch, a 4 to 4 switch, and switches with other numbers of inputs and outputs, also becomes clear. An nI input nO output core crossbar switch consists of nO copies of nI to 1 multiplexers, one for each switch output port, and an nI by nO flip-flop matrix, called the engagement matrix, whose element (i,j) is 1 if and only if output port j is engaged in transmitting an ongoing multi-word message coming from input port i. We will say that output j is engaged with input i if and only if the engagement matrix element (i,j) is a 1.

The following circuit describes the payload multiplexer input selection algorithm for output port j of a core crossbar switch, for j=0, 1, . . . , nO−1:

-   -   If output j is presently engaged with an input i, select input         payload i;     -   Else, if         -   There is an un-engaged input i whose address is selecting             output j; and         -   There is no un-engaged input i′<i whose address is selecting             output j and whose FIFO is not empty;     -   Select input payload i;     -   Else, do not select any input (input selection is immaterial; no         transfer to output j will occur).

The output j request signal (meaning output j sending FIFO interface of the core crossbar switch is not empty), for j=0, 1, . . . ,nO−1, is tied to a combinatorial signal which is true if and only if:

-   -   Output j is engaged with some input i whose FIFO is not empty;         or     -   Output j is not engaged with any input, and there is an         un-engaged input i whose input FIFO is not empty, and whose         address is equal to j.

The input i acknowledge signal (meaning that the input i receiving FIFO interface of the core crossbar switch is not full), for i=0, 1, . . . . nI−1, is tied to a combinatorial signal which is true if and only if:

-   -   Input i is engaged with some output j whose FIFO is not full; or     -   Input i is not engaged with any output, and input i's address         selects an un-engaged output j whose FIFO is not full, and there         is no un-engaged input i′<i whose FIFO is not empty and whose         address selects j

For any i=0, 1, . . . ,nI−1, and j0, 1, . . . nO−1, an actual transfer occurs from input port i to output port j on the next rising clock edge if and only if

-   -   Output j payload selects the input i payload,     -   Input FIFO i is not empty, and     -   Output FIFO j is not full.

The engagement matrix elements are set to 0 at system reset time. At the rising clock edge where the first word of a message is transferred from input port i to output port j, which is not also the last word, the ongoing connection is remembered by setting the engagement matrix element (i,j) to 1. At the rising clock edge where the last word of a multi-word message is transferred from input port i to output port j, the engagement matrix element (i,j) is reset to 0. The output port j then becomes free (not engaged), and is now open to contention by newly starting messages.

Referring to FIG. 6 , a traditional complete butterfly sub-network can be formed from the 2 to 2 crossbar switches described above, as follows. In the following paragraphs, the log₂(n)+1 stages of a n input n output traditional butterfly sub-network (where n is a power of two) are numbered 0,1, . . . ,log₂(n) starting from the output stage and going towards the input stage. Stage log 2(n) represents the receiving FIFO interface I/O pins for the inputs of the entire sub-network; there are no multiplexers in this stage. At each stage i, there are n nodes, and n/2 2 to 2 core crossbar switches including their small output FIFOs. In stage i, each pair of nodes (j,(j with bit i inverted)) form a 2 to 2 core crossbar switch. I.e., each node in stage i (comprising a 2 to 1 multiplexer and a small output FIFO) forms one half of a 2 to 2 crossbar switch. The core crossbar switch half represented by node j in stage i, is connected to node j in the previous stage i+1 with a straight set of wires, and is also connected to node (j with bit i inverted) in the previous stage i+1 with a transverse set of wires. The destination port address for the whole butterfly sub-network is given in a substring of the first word of a message, whose bit positions are known at compile time. The last stage (stage 0) uses bit 0 of the destination port address field of the first message word, stage 1 (one before the last stage) uses bit 1 of the destination port address field of the first message word, and so on. Stage log 2(n) does not use any address bit, since it has no multiplexers. The outputs of the small FIFOs of the core crossbar switches in the last stage, stage 0, constitute the sending FIFO interface I/O pins of the entire butterfly sub-network.

Referring to FIG. 7 , we introduce the incomplete butterfly sub-network, which is a customized butterfly sub-network where the number of inputs and outputs need not be a power of two. The incomplete butterfly sub-network is obtained by deleting unneeded edges and nodes from the corresponding complete butterfly sub-network. Since some nodes and edges may be missing in the incomplete butterfly sub-network, in some cases only 1 to 2, or 2 to 1, or even 1 to 1 (which can be implemented with just a small FIFO, to make paths latencies about equal) core crossbar switches are needed. If there is one output at a given core crossbar switch stage (a 2 to 1 switch or 1 to 1 switch) the corresponding address bit is not even looked at: the inputs (if more than 1) compete for the single output port. For example, when constructing a 5 to 3 incomplete butterfly sub-network as in FIG. 7 , only the last two stages (stages 1 and 0) need any 2 to 2 core crossbar switches. Stage 2 of this sub-network has one 2 to 1 (from nodes 0 and 4 of stage 3, to node 0 of stage 2), and three 1 to 1 core crossbar switches (from node k of stage 3 to node k of stage 2, k=1,2,3). Therefore, no address bit is needed for stage 2. Only two bits of destination port address, with stage 0 using address bit 0, and stage 1 using address bit 1, are needed for this example's incomplete butterfly sub-network.

A designated bit range

ADDR_LS_BIT to ADDR_LS_BIT+ceil(log₂(nOutputs))−1

within the first word of the message indicates the destination port number for the entire sub-network. In case there is only one output (e.g., an 8 to 1 incomplete butterfly sub-network), no address bits are used.

The incomplete butterfly sub-network consists of a subset of the nodes and edges of an imaginary complete butterfly sub-network, which is defined as follows:

Let m=ceil(log 2(max(nInputs,nOutputs)))

Let n=2m

The imaginary complete butterfly sub-network has m+1 stages and n nodes (n/2 2 to 2 core crossbar switches) at each stage. The required nodes and edges for the incomplete sub-network are selected using the following algorithm given in pseudo C++ code, from the complete butterfly sub-network. The selected edges and nodes in turn define the 2 to 2, 2 to 1, 1 to 2, or 1 to 1 crossbar switches, which should be constructed as part of the final Verilog output for the desired incomplete butterfly sub-network, and instantiated inside a top Verilog module with nInputs receiving FIFO interfaces and nOutputs sending FIFO interfaces. The width of the payload word will be passed as a Verilog parameter to the module. The least significant bit position of the destination port address for the entire sub-network, ADDR_LS_BIT, is also provided as a module parameter. In case the message format is single-word, not multi-word, the end-of-data bits of all the nInputs inputs can be tied permanently to 1; logic synthesis tools will then likely delete the associated logic examining the end-of-data bit.

//emit an incomplete butterfly sub-network //with nInputs inputs and nOutputs outputs //j with i'th bit negated int bitflip(int j , int i) {return j {circumflex over ( )} ( 1<<i ) ; } //a ones mask consisting of bits 0..i−1 (zero if i==0) int mask(i) { return (1<<i)−1;} void incomplete butterfly(const int nInputs,const int nOutputs) {  const int m=ceil(log2(max(nInputs , nOutputs)));//no. stages  const int n=(1<<m);//number of nodes at each stage  //stage[i][j]==incomplete butterfly sub-network stage i, node j exists  bool stage[m+1][n]; //initialized to all false  // preds[i][j]=nodes in stage i + 1 that are connected to stage i node j  set<int> preds[m][n];//initialized to empty sets  //create nodes for each input at stage m  for(int j=0; j< nInputs; ++j) stage[m][j]=true;  for (int i=m−1; i>=0; −−i) { //for each stage m−1 to 0   //look only at bit i for routing   for(int j=0;j<n; ++j) {//for each node j in that state    if (     //j with bits 0..i−1 cleared is among the outputs, and     (j& ~mask(i)) < nOutputs &&     //(j has a straight path predecessor in stage i+1, or     (stage[i+1][j] ||     //j has a transverse path predecessor in stage i+1)     stage[i+1][bitflip(j,i)]) {     //add this node j to stage i of the butterfly sub-network     stage[i][j]=true;     //add edge to j from straight path predecessor in stage i+1,     //if any     if(stage[i+1][j]) preds[i][j].insert(j);     //add edge to j from transverse path predecessor in stage i+1,     //if any     if(stage[i+1][bitflip(j,i)]) preds[i][j].insert(bitflip(j,i));    }   }  }  //now emit the Verilog code for the sub-network using preds and stage }

We just described a radix-2 incomplete butterfly sub-network. Radix-4 incomplete butterfly sub-networks and higher radix incomplete butterfly sub-networks can be similarly constructed based on the description above. For example, in a radix 4 incomplete butterfly sub-network implementation, each stage looks at 2 address bits; and at a given stage, groups of 4 nodes form a 4 input to 4 output core crossbar switch. The high fan-in payload priority multiplexer that occurs with higher radix designs can be optimized with known techniques such as parallel prefix sum [28]. Higher radix sub-networks will have lower frequency depending on the technology, but lower latency as well.

Appendix B. Task Sub-Network

A task sub-network sends a message from a requesting input port (i.e., whose FIFO is not empty) to any output port that can accept the request (i.e., whose FIFO is not full). With the objective of better load balancing, a task sub-network is formed from 2 input, 2 output task crossbar switches organized as a 1-dimensional torus in this preferred embodiment. Tasks will circulate in the torus until they find a free thread unit. A 2 to 2 task crossbar switch is a like a normal 2 to 2 core crossbar switch, but does not use any destination port address. A request at an input port of the task crossbar switch can be sent to any output port which can accept a request. The requesting inputs of a task crossbar switch are connected (“matched”) to accepting outputs in a single cycle, with a greedy graph matching algorithm applied to a complete bipartite graph (with requesting input ports on one side and accepting output ports on the other side), where the sequential code specification for the greedy matching algorithm is given by:

//Initially there are no connections (matching edges) //An input port i is requesting if //(input port i is un-engaged and its FIFO is not empty) //An output port j is accepting if //(output port j is un-engaged and its FIFO is not full), for(int i=0;i<nI;++i) {  if input port i is not requesting   continue;  for(int j=0;j<nO;++j) {   if output port j is not already connected, and   output port j is accepting    connect input port i to output port j  } }

We will describe the hardware for the general case, for a task crossbar switch with nI inputs and nO outputs. More precisely: the output port j payload, j=0, . . . ,nO−1 is determined by the following multiplexer input selection algorithm:

-   -   a) If there is an input i such that j is engaged with i, select         input payload i;     -   b) Else, if there is an un-engaged input i whose FIFO is not         empty, such that the number of un-engaged inputs i′<i whose FIFO         is not empty, is equal to the number of un-engaged outputs j′<j         whose FIFO is not full, select input payload i;     -   c) Else, do not select any input (output j payload selection is         immaterial; no transfer to output j will occur).         Note that if the bullet b) above selects an input i, the input         is unique (if there are n accepting outputs j′<j, output port j         will select the n+1st requesting input port, if there is one).         Output j may or may not accept a request (there is no need to         check, no harm is done if the request selected by the         multiplexer is not accepted). But in case output j does accept a         request, applying this bullet collectively for all outputs and         inputs of the task crossbar switch is equivalent to performing         the greedy matching algorithm in parallel.

Output j request (meaning: output j sending FIFO interface is not empty) is tied to the combinatorial signal which is true if and only if:

-   -   a) Output j is engaged with some input i whose FIFO is not         empty; or     -   b) Output j is not engaged with any input, and the number of         un-engaged outputs j′<j whose FIFO is not full is less than the         total number of un-engaged inputs whose FIFO is not empty.         Bullet b) means that the number of requesting inputs is larger         than the number of accepting outputs numerically less than j;         hence, if output port j will accept a request, then it is         guaranteed to get a request (but output port j may or may not         accept an incoming request; there is no need to check).

Input i acknowledge (meaning: input i receiving FIFO interface is not full) is tied to the combinatorial signal which is true if and only if:

-   -   a) Input i is engaged with some output j, and output j FIFO is         not full; or     -   b) Input i is not engaged with any output, and the number of         un-engaged inputs i′<i whose FIFO is not empty is less than the         total number of un-engaged outputs whose FIFO is not full.         Bullet b) means the total number of accepting outputs is larger         than the number of requesting inputs numerically less than i,         hence if there is a request from input port i, it is guaranteed         to get accepted (but input port i may or may not actually send a         request, there is no need to check).

Like the core crossbar switch, there are small 2-element FIFOs attached to each output port of a core task crossbar switch, which improve frequency. Also like the core crossbar switch, there is an engagement flip flop matrix in the task crossbar switch that works in the same manner.

Note that while the task crossbar switch provides a good load balancing service for dispatching tasks rapidly, in order to achieve high frequency, it is critical to optimize the circuits given above for comparing the cardinality (population count) of bit sets. The population count circuits can be optimized by the parallel prefix sum algorithm [28], which computes multiple sums of up to n inputs, within log 2(n) logic stages, which also allows the sharing of hardware, especially as the number of input and outputs increase. Frequency will be lower when the number of inputs and outputs are large, but total network latency will also be lower. Another alternative for achieving higher frequency is to pipeline a large task crossbar switch and share its hardware among multiple virtual systems. For task crossbar switches with only a few inputs and outputs, simple Verilog case statements can be used for comparing the cardinality of bit sets, for creating fast hardwired logic in an ASIC or a single LUT in an FPGA. For example, here is an efficient circuit in Verilog to determine if a 3 wide bit set has less elements than a 2 wide bit set:

function popcount_lt_3_2(input[2:0] a,input[1:0] b);  //return 1 iff the number of items in  //3-bit wide bit set “a”  //is less than the number of items in  //2-bit wide bit set “b”  case({a,b})  //synthesis full case para1lel case   00001, //0<l   00010, //0<l   00011, //0<2   00111, //1<2   01011, //1<2   10011: //1<2    popcount_lt_3_2=l;   default:    popcount_lt_3_2=0;  endcase endfunction

Referring to FIG. 8 , a scalable high frequency task sub-network shaped as a 1-dimensional torus with nInputs inputs and nOutputs outputs can be constructed with at least max(nInputs,nOutputs) task crossbar switches, each with up to 2 inputs and 2 outputs. The inputs of each task crossbar switch within the 1-dimensional torus will be tied to (higher priority input listed first)

-   -   1. If present, an outer loop thread unit task request output, or         the I/O controller output, after the task has made a round trip         in the supercomputer system;     -   2. The previous task crossbar switch in the torus.

The output ports of the task crossbar switch will be tied to (higher priority output listed first):

-   -   1. If present, the local thread unit input for accepting a new         task request, or an I/O controller input, to send the task         request for a trip around the supercomputer system;     -   2. The next task crossbar switch in the torus.

Note that in case of variable length messages being injected into the torus, there should be enough extra trivial 1 to 1 switches (just small FIFOs) in the torus, to avoid a deadlock in case the total length of the messages that are attempted to be injected into the torus exceeds the available FIFO stages in the circular path of the torus.

Also, note that a task sub-network may deliver results from an a given input port to an output port out of order, since a task that is sent first may be unlucky and may keep circulating around the thread units, while a task that is sent second may be more lucky and may find a free thread unit before the first one does.

Referring to FIG. 9 , a two dimensional torus task sub-network where task data flows from north and west inputs to south and east outputs, and where a task can be injected by a thread unit or I/O controller output, and can be extracted from the sub-network by local thread unit or I/O controller input, can be constructed with up to 3 input 3 output task crossbar switches. A 2-D torus will likely result in faster diffusion of tasks, compared to a 1-D torus.

Some alternative task sub-networks: An incomplete butterfly sub-network where the destination port number of each incoming request is obtained from a pseudo-random source, such as a substring of a linear feedback shift register, is one alternative task sub-network organization that can help load balancing and fast diffusion of tasks within the system. A task sub-network can also be created from an incomplete butterfly sub-network whose core crossbar switches are replaced by modified task crossbar switches, such that the sequence of un-engaged available outputs is first rotated by a pseudo-random amount, before routing un-engaged requesting inputs to un-engaged available outputs with the greedy matching algorithm. With such an approach, modified task crossbar switch output ports which only lead to busy thread units will eventually have full FIFOs; in which case the modified task crossbar switch will send an incoming task request to a random alternate available output port whose FIFO is not full (if there is such an output port). Selecting a random modified task crossbar switch output port whose FIFO is not full within an incomplete butterfly sub-network, will likely lead to faster diffusion of tasks and better load balancing.

Appendix C. Quiescence Detection Circuit

A quiescence detection circuit serves to determine that all activity has ceased in a collection of thread unit components connected to each other with task sub-networks. For example, consider an outer loop thread unit, which issues tasks to several inner loop thread units without waiting for the inner loops to finish. Assume that the inner loops in turn spawn several of their own inner loops without waiting for them to finish. The objective of the quiescence detection circuit for this collection of thread units is to ensure that the outer loop, all its inner loops, and their inner loops in turn, have completed, before starting a different activity that depends on the given loop nest.

While there exist several software quiescence detection algorithms that used in distributed computing [44], designing one in hardware has some advantages not available in software, which we will use here:

-   -   Each chip in the hardware has a real hardware clock, which         allows the latencies of quiescence messages within the same chip         to be determined precisely in terms of clock cycles;     -   It is inexpensive to create new special-purpose system-wide         hardware monitoring circuits for detecting quiescence.         The net result of these advantages is a substantially simpler         hardware quiescence detection algorithm as compared to its         software counterparts. It uses very little extra hardware. We         will describe this hardware algorithm here.

For the purpose of describing a quiescence detection circuit, it suffices to model the application-specific supercomputer system, which is possibly partitioned across multiple chips, as a directed graph whose nodes are either thread units or task networks, and each edge (x,y) indicates that the node x can potentially send a task request message to node y (i.e., x invokes y for side effects only, such that y does not return any register result to x). If there is no edge (x,y), then x cannot send a task request message to y. A particular set of nodes of the graph is identified as the roots set; the nodes in the roots set have no incoming edges. For example, the top region of the program is in the roots set. Quiescence signals propagate in the reverse direction of task requests in a depth-first spanning tree of the directed graph, from child thread units toward parent thread units. There will be a node propagation delay for each node (the time for a quiescence signal to propagate through this node, from the children of the present node toward the present node, normally one cycle), and an edge propagation delay for each edge (normally zero cycles, but with a higher delay for edges that cross chips, with the worst-case delay calibrated separately for each edge, at system initialization time). A set of edges in the directed graph are identified as quiescence observation edges. If an edge (x,y) is a quiescence observation edge, this means node x may send one or more task requests to y, and then may wait until all activity due to the task requests sent by x toy has completed. We assume that for each quiescence observation edge (x,y), x dominates [35] all nodes reachable from y. As examples, a tree-shaped directed graph topology meets this dominator requirement. In a directed graph making recursive task invocations (which will certainly include cyclic paths), if the main task that makes the first recursive call is the only one that needs to observe quiescence of all recursive tasks, it indeed dominates all nodes executing the recursive calls, so the same condition is satisfied. Optimization 6 in the optimizations section, relaxes this dominator requirement for quiescence detection.

To create the quiescence detection circuits, first:

-   -   Nodes in the directed graph are given reverse post order numbers         with a depth-first search;     -   At each root node of the graph, a depth-first spanning tree is         identified; and     -   The propagation delay height of each node (maximum delay from         this to node to any of the leaves of the spanning sub-tree         rooted at this node) is computed.

Here is the pseudo C++ code of the initial algorithm:

int n=N; //N=number of nodes bool visited[N]; //initially false int rpost[N];//reverse post order number of X int height[N];//height of subtree rooted at x set<Edge> T; //spanning tree edges void visit(Node x) { visited[x]=true; int d=0; for each unvisited successor s of x {  visit (s);  d=max(d,height[s]+edgeDelay(x,s));  add (x, s) to T; } rpost [x] = −−n; height[x]=d+nodeDelay(x); } //initial call //foreach r in roots visit(r);

Referring to FIG. 11 , for each node in the graph we create a basic building block of a quiescence detection circuit, called the Qunit flip-flop, which drives the input_quiesced output pin of the present node, and where at each rising clock edge, the flip-flop is set to the logical AND of:

-   -   the Qunit flip-flops all the child nodes of the present node in         the spanning tree (arriving via the output_quiesced input pins         of this node), and     -   the idle signal of the present node.

The result is a pipelined flip-flop tree continuously propagating quiescence monitoring signals (meaning “I am idle in this cycle, and all my children in the spanning tree were idle in the previous cycle”) toward the root of the spanning tree. Only for the directed edges (x,y) included in the spanning tree, the sending FIFO of parent node x has an output_quiesced input pin, which is tied directly to the input_quiesced output pin on the corresponding receiving FIFO of the child node y, in turn tied to the Qunit flip-flop output of the child unit. Edges (sending and receiving FIFO connections) that are not on any spanning tree do not include input_quiesced or output_quiesced pins.

Each node in the graph has an output signal called idle, which is 1 if and only if there is no activity within the unit, as follows:

-   -   A thread unit is idle if and only if it has completed any prior         task request and is in the state where it is waiting for a new         task request to arrive;     -   A task sub-network is idle if and only if all FIFOs within the         sub-network are empty.

The idle signal fed to the Qunit may not reflect the current state of the node instantly: A node x is allowed to send a task request message to a currently idle node z at cycle t, and x can then immediately become idle on the next cycle t+1. If node z's idle output does not become 0 until cycle t+M+1, for an M>0, due pipelining in the x to z task request transmission (possibly crossing chips) or due to a deeply pipelined calculation of the idle signal within z, there may be a period of M cycles where a task is present in the system but is not observed any of by the idle monitoring signals. We will call this amount M the maximum task hiding time, and will also consider it before inferring quiescence. The task hiding time will be computed separately for each quiescence observation edge. For the system to work, every hiding task should eventually come out of hiding, i.e., M should, of course, be finite, and should be engineered to be as small as possible.

On each edge (x,y) which is a quiescence observation edge, a flip-flop called the quiescence flip-flop is created inside the parent node x, associated with the sending FIFO that sends task requests from node x to node y. The quiescence flip-flop operates as follows:

-   -   The quiescence flip-flop is set to 1 at system reset time.     -   If the quiescence flip flop is 1, and a task request is accepted         into sending FIFO (i.e., the task request is launched to the         task network), the quiescence flip-flop is set to 0.     -   Else, if the quiescence flip flop is 0, and a new task request         is not being accepted at this time, and the output_quiesced         input signal has remained 1 for a sufficient number of back to         back cycles (equal to the propagation delay height of the         sub-tree rooted at y plus the maximum task hiding time for nodes         reachable from y), the quiescence flip-flop is set back to 1         again.

A second parallel activity to be launched from node x, that depends on the y loop nest, can simply be delayed until the quiescence flip-flop for the first activity is 1. If the quiescence flip-flop is 1, it means the loop nest y was either never started, or all logically earlier instances of the loop nest y were already completed.

To determine that the incoming output_quiesced signal from node y is 1 for a sufficient number of back to back cycles, at the quiescence detection edge (x,y), we simply add a counter associated with the sending FIFO in node x that dispatches tasks to y. The quiescence flip-flop itself can be implemented as the sign bit of the counter, where the counter does the following:

-   -   At system initialization time, the counter is set to −1 (the         quiescence flip-flop is set to 1).     -   If a new task is being accepted into the sending FIFO         (output_request and output_acknowledge are both 1), the counter         is set to the non-negative value M+k−1, where k the propagation         delay height of the node y, and M is the maximum task hiding         time for nodes reachable from y; The quiescence flip flop is         therefore set to 0;’     -   Else, if the input_quiesced signal from the sending FIFO         interface is 0, the counter is set to M+k−1; The quiescence flip         flop is therefore set to 0;     -   Else, if the counter is not less than 0 (and therefore the         quiescence flip flop is 0), the counter is decremented;         -   // The quiescence flip flop will become 1 when the counter             value of 0 is decremented to −1     -   Else, the counter does not change.         -   // The counter should now be −1; and the quiescence flip             flop should be 1     -   All this circuitry is quite inexpensive (a flip-flop and a few         gates for the Qunit building blocks at each node, plus a counter         at the quiescence observation edges). The counter (1201) in FIG.         12 implements this combined quiescence flip flop and counter         idea.

For the simple case where each node has one cycle latency for propagating quiescence signals, and all edges have zero cycle latency, here is why this technique does detect quiescence correctly. Assume the propagation delay height of node y is k. If the output_quiesced input from the quiescence observation edge (x,y) is 1 in cycle n, since the quiescence circuit is pipelined, this means level 1 node(s) of the spanning tree rooted at y were idle in cycle n−1, level 2 node(s) of the spanning tree were idle in cycle n−2, . . . level k node(s) of the spanning tree were idle at cycle n−k. If the output_quiesced signal at the quiescence detection edge is 1 for M+k consecutive cycles n,n+1, n+2, . . . , n+M+k−1, then

-   -   All level 1 nodes were idle in cycles n−1,n,n+1 . . .         ,n+M−2,n+M−1 . . . ,n+M+k−2     -   All level 2 nodes were idle in cycles n−2,n−1,n, . . .         ,n+M−2,n+M−1, . . . ,n+M+k−3     -   . . .     -   All kevel k nodes were idle in cycles n−k,n−k+1, . . . ,n−1,n, .         . . ,n+M−2,n+M−1     -   Then there are at least M consecutive cycles, namely cycles         n−1,n, . . . ,n+M−2, where all nodes in all levels of the         spanning tree were idle. Therefore, until a new task is injected         at the quiescence observation edge (x,y) again, for each node z         reachable from y:     -   No existing but hiding task will ever appear in z (since z         remained idle for the maximum task hiding time); and     -   No new task will ever come to z from any node (since x dominates         all nodes reachable from y and all of these are idle).     -   Therefore, the collection of nodes reachable from y has         quiesced. Note that nodes with many children can be modeled as a         tree of nodes, each with a small number of children; also, edges         that cross chips within a predictable maximum number of cycles         can be modeled by a chain of single output, single input         one-cycle nodes where the chain length is equal to the         calibrated delay; thus, as long as the cross chip worst case         delay calibration is accurate, this argument also works for the         general case.

When a spanning tree edge (x₁, x₂) with x₁ being a parent unit and x₂ being a child unit, crosses chips, we should simulate the wire driven by the input_quiesced output of x₂ and going to the output_quiesced input of x₁ with cross-chip “signal toggle” messages each time the value on the wire changes. Messages are best sent across chips connected with fast serial links, through sending FIFOs in the message originator chip and receiving FIFOs in the message recipient chip. A wire input to sending FIFO converter is added after the x₂ input_quiesced output: When x₂ input_quiesced output changes state, a “signal toggle” message is sent to the cross-chip sending FIFO. After the “signal toggle” message reaches the receiving FIFO within the destination chip containing x₁, a receiving fifo to wire output converter is used between the cross chip receiving FIFO and the x₁ output_quiesced input pin.

A wire input to sending FIFO converter works as follows: if the input wire has a different value than it had in the previous cycle, output_request is asserted, with output_payload being equal to the new wire value. The local FIFO size should be large enough to guarantee that there will not be a write to the local FIFO when it is full.

A receiving FIFO to wire output converter works as follows: The input_acknowledge signal is tied to 1. When input_request is 1, the input-payload is captured in a register driving the wire output.

Of course, in order to announce that a loop nest has quiesced, all the stores within the loop nest should also have completed. We should therefore add the quiescence signals for memory store (or update) instructions issued from the thread units, to the quiescence detection circuits for a loop nest. As also summarized around the paragraph above beginning with the words “The quiescence of a store alone is easier to detect than a loop nest . . . ”, this is accomplished as follows: An outstanding store counter is associated with each master port performing stores connected to the memory hierarchy in the thread unit, which is set to −1 at system reset time. Each time a store or update request is accepted into the sending FIFO of the memory master port, the outstanding store counter is incremented. Each time a zero-width acknowledge comes back from a store or update operation, in the receiving FIFO of the same master post, the outstanding store counter is decremented. It is possible for the counter to be incremented and decremented at the same time, which results in a no-op for the counter. A dependent activity that should wait for the stores from a particular master port to complete, can simply wait until the (outstanding store counter==−1) signal is true Thus, the sign bit of the counter (counter<0) can be used to mean the store has quiesced. For each memory master port of a thread unit, the (outstanding store counter<0) signals are fed as inputs to the Qunit AND gate for the present thread unit, in addition to the output_quiesced signals coming from the child nodes in the spanning tree. In case the counter will overflow (there were too many outstanding store requests), a new store request should be stalled until the counter is decremented. FIG. 12 shows the complete quiescence detection circuit for a loop nest, which includes both stores and inner loops.

To use the present quiescence detection algorithm with I/O controllers within a partitioned design, a new network, say Z, is created for sending quiescence “signal toggle” messages only. Given that a task request edge (x₁,x₂) is on the spanning tree and crosses chips, for sending a “quiescence signal toggle” message from the chip containing unit x₂ to the chip containing unit x₁, the wire input to sending FIFO converter unit on chip containing x₂ is connected as a master port of the Z network, and the wire to receiving FIFO converter on the chip containing unit x₁ is connected as a slave port of the Z network. Then the signal toggle message is sent from the source wire to FIFO converter to the destination FIFO to wire converter like any regular message crossing chips. Signal toggle messages (Z network messages) should have highest priority within I/O controllers, followed by task requests, followed by other messages. Moreover, the maximum packet size of any message should be limited, in order to reduce the worst-case latencies.

Energy saving optimization: Cross-chip messages consume energy. In order to save energy in a situation where many “signal toggle” messages are sent from chip to chip due to random 0-1-0 quiescence transitions, the following technique can be used. When a Qunit in a chip containing a child node, transitions from 0 to 1, the wire to FIFO converter should wait until the Qunit remains 1 for a few more back-to-back cycles before sending the “signal toggle” for the 0 to 1 transition to the chip containing the parent node. This optimization might delay the quiescence detection, but will not lead to an incorrect quiescence conclusion.

Quiescence of speculative computations: Notice that by the time a thread unit finishes working on a task request, any speculative loads and inner loops returning a result that were on the taken path, will be completed. Any speculative loads and inner loops that were not on the taken path, might still be ongoing, but do not matter; the system will not wait for their quiescence, until an outstanding operation tag due to a prior ongoing speculative load or inner loop needs to be re-used.

Appendix D. Estimating the Component Replication Counts and Latencies Estimating the Loop Replication Count

Obtaining an initial estimate of the loop replication count: Such an estimate can be obtained from a theoretical maximum parallelism simulation (implemented by the profiler) that implements the present document's spawn-and-forget parallelism model, and returns the maximum and average number of outstanding invocations of an inner loop at any given simulated cycle. If this profiling input is not available, a user-specified value or a compiler-default value can be initially used for the replication count for an inner loop. When the inner loop is not invoked from a loop (e.g., it is invoked from the outermost program region) a replication count of 1 should be used.

After the initial replication count is obtained, for the case of an inner loop that returns a register response, we need the latency of the inner loop thread, in order to perform the scheduling. The average and maximum values of this latency can also be estimated with a theoretical maximum spawn-and-forget parallelism simulation done by the profiler. The estimated inner loop latency may then need to be reduced, for the following reasons:

-   -   Resource constraints such as register pressure: we should often         settle for a smaller number for the inner loop latency.     -   Deadlock avoidance: the inner loop latency used by the compiler         should not be greater than (the actual replication count of the         inner loop times the minimum initiation interval, for back to         back inner loop invocations), because of the following reason:         if n+1 requests are sent to n inner loop thread units without         receiving the response from the first request, there is a danger         of deadlock, in case the forward network and reverse network         FIFOs are all full. A deadlock of this kind will occur even when         n+1 outstanding requests are sent to any pipelined unit (even a         multiplier) of n stages, before receiving the response for the         first request.

Corrections to the replication count with static scheduling: An inner loop, which does return a register result, can be scheduled with an estimated latency equal at most to the replication count of the inner loop, but subsequently, the loop replication count of the inner loop may need to be further reduced, to the maximum number of outstanding invocation requests to the inner loop, occurring in the resulting schedule. For example, if the compiler believes that an inner loop is on a dependence cycle with its own instance in the prior iteration of the outer loop, instances of the inner loop cannot run in parallel, and just one outstanding instance of this inner loop will suffice (the loop replication count for this inner loop will be 1).

Corrections to replication count through hardware profiling feedback: Loop invocations may have a varying latency, and may contain conditional dependences that are not easy to estimate without generating the initial hardware. Thus, hardware profiling feedback will be useful for determining replication hardware parameters. While an FPGA-based prototype of the hardware is constructed, the following circuits for collecting statistics about each task network can be added to the design: The hardware profiling circuits will monitor the “idle” signals from each of the thread units for an inner loop (“idle” is true, if and only if the thread unit is in the idle (start) state, waiting for a new request). The population count of the 0 bits in this “idle” bit vector is the current number of busy thread units, which can be sampled every cycle through a pipelined multi-stage population count tree circuit. By recording the maximum of the samples, the sum of the samples and the number of samples, and reading back the registers containing the results from each chip, through a serial scan-chain running through the profiling units in the entire chip, at the end of benchmark runs, the average utilization of the thread units can be measured. Then, during the next compilation, the thread units for a given inner loop that were too busy can be increased, subject to resource constraints. The thread units that were not fully utilized can be reduced in number. The new replication count can be used as the new scheduling latency during subsequent runs. The hardware profiling/recompilation cycle can be repeated as needed.

An important special case: In an important special case likely to occur in scientific code, where the inner loop has a predictable latency of M cycles, and the inner loops spawned in consecutive iterations of the outer loop are independent from each other, M copies of the inner loop can be created, to achieve the behavior of a true primitive pipelined operation for the inner loop, capable of accepting a request every cycle. In this case the outer loop can be executed at a rate of one iteration per cycle if other dependences and resources permit. The same technique can be used for another loop that encloses the outer loop, to achieve one iteration per cycle as well, by replicating thread units for the outer loop (along with their inner loop replicas), if other dependences are resources permit. In an ideal case that entails the creation a large special purpose supercomputer, an outermost loop in a program may sustain one iteration per cycle. This approach requires the creation of increasingly larger pipelined register files in outer loops, instead of the usual flip-flops, to tolerate the register pressure as inner loop latencies increase. Any inner loop that does not return a register value (executed for side effects only) does not add to the register pressure.

Estimating Latency of Complex Operations

The compiler needs to know the latency of complex operations that return a response, to construct the finite state machine. We already indicated how to estimate the inner loop latencies in the previous section.

For standard pipelined operations (multiply, divide) the latency will be the natural latency of these operations, based on how the library unit was designed.

For loads sent to a coherent low-latency private cache, as described, for example, in FIG. 16 , the latency will be the minimum L1 cache hit latency. Coherent low-latency private L1 caches are the preferred for creating a finite state machine, because of their fixed latency in the case of a hit.

To reduce unnecessary port usage, the utilization of cache ports can be monitored by including simple hardware profiling circuits in an FPGA prototype of the design, which do the following.

-   -   For each memory load/store master port, a counter is created,         which counts the cycles where there was at least one outstanding         memory request.     -   For the containing region/loop, another counter is created,         which counts the cycles where the loop thread unit was not idle.

After reading out the various hardware profiling counters for each chip in the entire supercomputer with a serial scan-chain at the end of the benchmark test, we can compute:

-   -   The utilization of each memory load/store port as (total cycles         there was an outstanding load/store request)/(total non-idle         cycles of the thread unit).

Based on the profiling feedback, we can then:

-   -   Reduce the maximum number of ports if utilization of some ports         is very low before re-scheduling and recreating the hardware.         This schedule/re-run cycle can be repeated as needed.

Bank-interleaved caches can be similarly scheduled first with the minimal hit latency. The scheduler can then create as many ports as dependences and resource constraints allow. The number of banks can be found using a heuristic function, e.g., the smallest power of two that is at least as large as the number of ports, but not exceeding a resource limit. But, by adding profiling circuits to the hardware to monitor the load latency, switch contention and memory bank contention, during a second scheduling of the hardware,

-   -   The number of ports can be reduced if utilization is low     -   The latency assumed by the compiler can be increased to account         for the minimum butterfly network delays     -   The number of banks, the interleaving distribution, and the         switch organization can be changed, based on the profiling         feedback.

Estimating the Replication Count of Complex Operations

If the total number of thread unit master ports requesting a particular kind of complex operation does not exceed a resource budget, the preferred approach is to connect a dedicated complex operation unit to each complex operation master port of each thread unit. The complex operation unit will be connected to the thread unit master port with a dedicated one-to-one task network.

If the maximum allowable number of complex operation units of the given kind is M, and there are N>M master ports on the thread units requesting this kind of complex operation, we can create a task network with N master ports and M slave ports, where the M complex operation units are connected to the M slave ports of the task network. A few critical thread unit master ports that request this kind of complex operation very frequently can still be given their own dedicated complex operation units.

In each of the above cases, optimization number 5 in the optimizations section can be applied for further reduction of resources, for example, for sharing hardware between different kinds of complex operations or different kinds of loops.

Appendix E. A Memory Hierarchy with a Directory-Based Write-Update Coherence Protocol

While any multi-ported memory hierarchy can be used by the present document's method, a scalable and efficient multi-ported memory hierarchy is very important for achieving good performance.

In the cited art on directory-based cache organizations [45], the directory-based write-invalidate protocol has been used, for supporting multi-threaded parallel software. We present a directory-based write-update coherence protocol suitable for highly parallel execution of single-threaded software in this section. A write-update cache is perhaps the ideal coherent cache, where a store to a shared line in one cache, automatically updates all copies of the line in the other caches, avoiding the data ping-ponging that occurs in write-invalidate caches using the MESI coherence protocol [46].

The write-update memory coherence mechanism to be described in this section possesses the following features:

-   -   Even when a clean line is replaced by an L1 cache, it sends an         abandon message for this line to the directory responsible for         the line, so that the directory is aware of the correct set of         L1 caches owning the line at all times. In turn, the         always-correct bookkeeping on the set of L1s that share a line         leads to reduced network traffic during a store broadcast (write         update). During a store broadcast, communication occurs strictly         between the Lis that are sharing the line, and the directory         responsible for the line, through scalable networks.     -   The single-threaded programming model of the present document         simplifies the memory hierarchy hardware:         -   If instances of two memory instructions (at least one of             which is a store) in the execution trace of the single             threaded program refer to the same address, the compiler             already ensures that the logically earlier one completes its             access, including cache misses and store broadcasts, before             the logically later one starts, through an intervening             synchronization action, such as quiescence detection.             Therefore, if two memory instructions refer to the same             cache line without an intervening synchronization action,             they should be referring to different locations within that             line (i.e., false sharing): the two memory instruction             actions on the cache line can be reordered without impacting             the final result of the program.         -   There is no need for implementing multi-processor locking             instructions such as test-and-set, compare-and-swap or             memory barrier instructions, which occur only in             multi-threaded software and not in parallelized             single-threaded software.

The combined implication of these features is significant, and makes a scalable directory-based write-update protocol simpler to implement.

The set of requests on a memory load/store network (between a thread unit master port and an L1 cache slave port) include:

load address

-   -   response: data

store address data

-   -   response: acknowledge

update_op address data //MEM[address]=MEM[address] op data

-   -   response: acknowledge

flush all //flush all dirty lines, and invalidate all lines

-   -   response: acknowledge

The acknowledge response for store, update and flush all requests, is used by a thread unit only for memory quiescence detection and does not normally cause a stall. E.g., the finite state machine implementing a thread unit does not wait for a given store's acknowledge signal unless a logically later load, store or inner loop needs to occur after the logically earlier store, because of a specific dependence found by the compiler.

The address space of the hardware accelerator is the software application address space (any distinction between virtual vs. real memory is not relevant for the hardware accelerator). The address space is partitioned into disjoint sections each handled by its own directory. The cache directory for a section of the address space handles traffic between the L1 caches and the L2 cache for this section of the address space, and is responsible for maintaining the owners set for each line in this section of the address space. Owner sets that are not empty are cached inside the directory unit's owner set cache, when cache space is available, in order to avoid accesses to the L2 cache where possible. For example, when the owner set for a line is cached in the directory's owner set cache, and an L1 cache y accesses the same line for the first time, when the line is already present in a different L1 cache x, L1 cache y can recognize that the line is available in L1 cache x, by consulting the cached owner set in the directory, and can obtain the line from the L1 cache x, without requiring any accesses to the L2. Owner sets that are empty are never cached inside the directory unit. The L2 line has been extended to include the owner set: the L2 constitutes the backing store for owner sets cached within the directories' owner set caches.

In the present write-update cache, we will be using only the Invalid, Exclusive, and Shared states of the MESI coherence protocol. There will be no Modified state. Hence, we can call the present cache coherence protocol the ESI coherence protocol. There is also a dirty bit associated with each line in each L1 cache. An L1 cache that stores into a line contained in it, marks the line as dirty. A line is clean (not dirty) when it is first brought into an L1 cache, and can then be independently marked dirty in each L1 cache that shares it: this feature reduces data races.

We will describe the coherence requests sent from L1 caches to a directory in the write-update protocol. This cache coherence protocol has been designed to minimize data races, and to enable simple parallel operation. The only ways a remote coherence request can change an L1 line are as follows:

-   -   a remote store to a shared line can change this L1's line data.     -   a remote line read request can change this L1 line's Exclusive         state to Shared.         The dirty bit is not changed remotely.

Here is the complete list of coherence requests:

Remote store address data

-   -   //Issued when the requester stores into a shared line. The         requester says: I am writing to a line I share with you, I would         like to update your copy of the line as well.         -   Response: acknowledge         -   Action:             -   If the owner set for this line is not cached in the                 directory's owner set cache, the line and owner set are                 read from the L2 into the directory's owner set cache                 (if needed, a previously modified owner set is written                 back to the L2 to make space; only the owner set and not                 the line data is written back to L2).             -   The remote store is sent to each of the other line                 owners, which updates its line with the specified store                 operation. The dirty bit of the other cache is not                 impacted. Any “least recently used” data structure in                 the other cache is not impacted either.                 -   Comment: The remote store instruction will normally                     not cause a cache miss, since the other owners                     should each have a copy of the line.             -   The requester's line becomes dirty, so that the                 requester is now one of the owners responsible for                 flushing the line to the parent.                 -   Comment: Multiple copies of the line may be marked                     dirty but it is harmless to flush the same line                     twice when the second flush stores the same data, or                     if the first flushed value is dead (will be                     overwritten before being read).

line_read lineAddress

-   -   //Issued when the requester wishes to load or store an invalid         line. The requester says: I want to read the line at address         lineAddress; my current ESI state for this line is Invalid.         -   Response: yourNewEsiState (Shared|Exclusive), line data         -   Action:             -   If the owner set for this line is not cached in the                 directory's owner set cache, the line and owner set are                 read from the L2 cache into the directory's owner set                 cache (if needed, a previously modified owner set is                 written back to the L2 to make space; only the owner set                 is written back to L2).             -   If there is another owner,                 -   The same line read message is forwarded to the first                     other owner, so that the first other owner responds                     with the line contents, and changes its state to                     Shared if it is not already Shared. The response                     (line contents) is then sent back to the requester,                     who gets the line in Shared state as a clean (not                     dirty) line. The dirty state of the other owner is                     not changed.                 -   The requester is added to the existing set of owners                     of this line.             -   Else, /If there is no other owner                 -   A line read message is sent to the L2. The line is                     then forwarded to the requester who gets the line as                     a clean (not dirty) line, in Exclusive state.                 -   The requester is added as the sole owner of this                     line.

flush lineAddress lineData byteMask

-   -   //Issued when the requester should replace a dirty line. The         requester says: I stored into this line and made it dirty. I am         replacing this dirty line. Your shared copies are already         identical to mine.         -   Response: acknowledge         -   Action:             -   If the owner set for this line is not cached in the                 directory's owner set cache, the line and owner set are                 read from the L2 into the directory's owner set cache                 (if needed, a previously modified owner set is written                 back to the L2 to make space; only the owner set is                 written back to L2).             -   The requester is removed from the line's owner set.                 -   Comment: Even only one owner L1 cache is left, it is                     not made exclusive (shared is sticky).             -   The line data and the owner set are written to the L2                 cache at the given address. Only the specified bytes in                 the byteMask are written to the L2.                 -   Comment: The byte mask avoids the false sharing                     error, if another independent memory's collection of                     L1's wishes to write to another part of the same                     line in the same L2 cache. See optimization 1.             -   If the owner set is empty,                 -   The owner set is removed from the directory's owner                     set cache;             -   Else,                 -   The owner set is made clean (not modified) in the                     directory's owner set cache.

abandon lineAddress

-   -   //Requester: I am replacing this shared line which I did not         store in; adjust your records         -   Response: acknowledge         -   Action:             -   If the line's owner set is not in the directory's owner                 set cache, the owner set is read from the L2 into the                 directory's owner set cache (if needed, a previously                 modified owner set is written back to the L2, to make                 space; only the owner set is written back to the L2).             -   The requester is removed from the line's owner set.                 -   Comment: Even only one owner L1 cache is left, it is                     not made exclusive (shared is sticky).

A store to an invalid line can be executed as:

a line_read of the line, followed by

a remote_store to the other owners of the line.

Here are further L1 actions (cache hit cases) not requiring any communication with a directory: When the incoming request is a load and the line is in the Exclusive or Shared state, the load request is performed without notifying the directory. When the incoming request is a store or update and the line is in the Exclusive state, the store or update request is performed, and the line is made dirty, without notifying the directory.

Preventing harmful data races during parallel operation: L1 caches should work independently and in parallel, generally not being aware of the activities in other L1 caches or directories. In particular, the memory operations that follow a store to a shared line and that do not depend on the store, should execute uninterrupted without any possibility of a roll-back, while the store broadcast to the other Lis that share the line occurs in highly pipelined fashion. Initially all caches are empty. The compiler has placed synchronization between dependent memory operations as follows:

-   -   When a store I₁ is followed by a dependent load or store I₂, the         second instruction I₂ waits until the first one I₁ quiesces (an         acknowledge is received from all prior store broadcasts).     -   When a load I₁ is followed by a dependent store I₂, the store is         not issued until the load has resolved all cache misses and has         returned its data.     -   At the end of execution, a final flush all is issued in each L1         cache after all logically earlier stores have quiesced, and all         loads on the taken program path have resolved their cache misses         and returned their data.

The order in which coherence requests for a given line arrive at the directory is called the primary execution order for this line: regardless of the unpredictable order of parallel activity in the Lis, the equivalent of a global atomic transaction is performed for each coherence request for a given line, following the primary execution order. In general, a coherence request op1 from L1 a and another coherence request op2 from L1 b can have a primary execution order of (a, op1),followed by (b,op2) in the directory while in the L1s the order of events is reversed, as in (b,op2) followed by (a,op1), because of the unpredictable, parallel independent operation of each L1. Here op1 and op2 can be any of the commands (line read, remote store, flush, abandon). In this implementation, a single request queue in an L1 selects an incoming coherence request (remote_store, remote line read) from a remote cache or an incoming load/store request from the attached thread unit, with incoming remote coherence requests having higher priority. A cache miss might lead a remote line read for the new line being brought in to the L1 cache, followed by a flush or abandon request for the line being replaced. The following three modifications are sufficient to support parallel execution of the coherence requests from Lis, without any roll-backs or “NACK-negative acknowledge” responses as in other complex directory-based designs:

-   -   A flush or abandon request also saves the flushed/abandoned line         in a victim cache associated with the current L1 and keeps going         without waiting for any acknowledge. When the acknowledge         response is eventually returned to the current L1 from the flush         or abandon request, the victim cache line is automatically         released/deallocated at the next coherence action boundary.     -   A remote line read from an L1 cache a, looks for the requested         line first in the current L1 cache b, and then in the victim         cache of current L1 cache b (it should find the line in one of         the two).     -   A remote store from an L1 cache a, will be ignored if the line         is not in the current L1 cache b.

We enumerate below each possible pair of coherence request events in the order they arrive in the directory (the primary execution order), discuss what happens if the order of events is reversed in the L1s, and show that in each case the result of the program still remains the same as if the primary execution order were followed sequentially. Where the result is different, the difference does not matter, the final result of the program is not changed:

-   -   (a, line read) followed by (b, line read) in the directory:         Assume that initially neither L1 a nor L1 b have the line.         Assume that first b requests a line read and waits, and then a         requests a line read and waits, but that the line read from a         arrives first in the directory. Initially the line read from a         reads the line from memory as an exclusive line. Then the line         read from b will read from the line in a, making the line shared         in a and b.     -   (a, line read), (b, remote store): Assume that initially only b         and c have the line. Assume that the store/remote store request         in L1 b occurs first, immediately continuing after sending the         request, before a remote line read request is sent from L1 a,         but a's request arrives first in the directory. a's line read         will get the line value from b, but it will get the new value         (after the store from b) instead of the correct old value. But         reordering does not change the program result since operands do         not overlap. Then, the remote store is completed, updating the         line in a as well. Result of reordering is different, but the         difference is immaterial.     -   (a, line read), (b, flush or abandon): Assume that initially the         line is only in b. Assume that the flush or abandon request in         L1 b occurs before the remote line read request in L1 a, but a's         request arrives first in the directory. Then, the flush or         abandon request is sent by b to the directory, the line is saved         in a victim cache in b, and b immediately proceeds with other         instructions. The directory will first complete the line read         from a, which will attempt to pick up the line from b, since b         is listed as an owner of the line. When the remote line read         arrives in cache L1 b, the line is not found in the cache but it         is picked up from the victim cache. The line is received as a         shared line in a. Then the flush or abandon from b is completed         (b is removed from the owner set and the flushed line is written         to memory (if a flush)), and an acknowledge is sent back to b         which will release the victim cache line at the next coherence         action boundary.     -   (a, remote store), (b, line read): Assume that initially only a         and c have the line. Assume b issues the line read request first         and waits for the response, and then a issues the remote store         and keeps going. But the remote store request from a arrives         first in the directory. The remote store from a gets completed         first in the directory, by forwarding the request to c only         (since b does not yet have the line) and waiting for an         acknowledge. Then the line read from b is completed, bypassing         the updated line from a and returning that line to b.     -   (a, remote store), (b, remote store): Assume that initially a         and b both have the line. Assume that b sends the remote store         request first, followed by the remote store request from a, but         a's request makes it to the directory first. In L1 cache b, the         local store from b is followed by remote store from a. In L1         cache a, a local store from a is followed by remote store         from b. Since the stores are independent and the store operands         are not overlapping, reordering the stores does not impact the         result of the program.     -   (a, remote store), (b, flush or abandon): Assume that initially         both a and b have the line. Assume that the flush or abandon is         requested first by L1 cache b causing the line to be removed         from b, and then the remote store is requested in L1 cache a,         but a's request arrives first in the directory. The remote store         from a will be completed by being forwarded to b, and causing a         cache miss, which will be ignored. Finally the flush or abandon         from b will be processed, writing the old value of the line (if         a flush) in memory. The value stored in memory is dead, since         each line read will bypass from the line in a, and since the         line in a is now dirty. Result of reordering is different, but         the difference is immaterial.     -   (a, flush or abandon), (b, line read): Assume that initially a         has the line. Assume that b requests a line read first and waits         for a response, and then a requests a flush or abandon and keeps         going. But a's request arrives first in the directory. The flush         or abandon by a is completed in the directory, removing a from         the owner set and storing the flushed line in memory (if a         flush). Then b's line read is completed in the directory, by         reading back the flushed line from memory and returning the line         to b as the response.     -   (a, flush or abandon), (b, remote store): Assume that initially         a, b and c have the line. Assume that b first requests a remote         store and keeps going and then a requests a flush or abandon and         keeps going. But a's request arrives first in the directory. The         flush or abandon by a will be completed in the directory first,         by removing a from the owner set and writing the line to memory         (if a flush), then the remote store from b will be completed in         the directory by forwarding the remote store to c and waiting         for an acknowledge.     -   (a, flush or abandon), (b, flush or abandon): Assume that both a         and b have the line initially. Assume b sends the flush or         abandon request first, then a sends its flush or abandon         request, but a's request arrives first in the directory. The         flush or abandon requests are completed in the directory         transaction order. Finally neither a nor b have the line.

We will now describe the structure of the memory hierarchy hardware. The baseline memory hierarchy consists of:

-   -   One data L1 cache unit for each memory port of each thread unit.         Coherence is maintained with other L1 data caches using a         directory-based ESI coherence protocol whose request types were         listed above. The L1 cache has:         -   one memory load/store slave port for receiving load, store,             update, and flush-all requests from the thread unit.         -   one coherence slave port for receiving remote_store,             line_read, and abandon requests from any directory.         -   one coherence master port for sending remote_store,             line_read, flush, abandon requests to a directory.     -   The L1 cache can accept a new load/store/update request every         cycle when there are hits and dependences permit. A fast         pipelined L1 cache can be constructed that does not check for         any dependences between memory instructions, since the compiler         already imposes synchronization between dependent memory         instructions. Alternatively, the L1 cache can be designed to         respect sequential dependences between requests: for example, a         load after a store reads the new value of the memory location,         if the store and load addresses are the same. Update requests         should be atomic in all cases, since compiler dependence         analysis assumes updates are atomic.     -   Several directory units, each connected to a corresponding L2         unit with a one to one network, and each responsible for a         section of the address space.     -   The nearby DRAM unit on the board contains the L2 cache data and         tag array, including valid bits, dirty bits and owner set (i.e.,         the set of L1 data caches that have this line). The owner sets         only for lines that have at least one owner L1 cache, will be         cached inside the directory's owner set cache (if cache space         can accommodate these owner sets). Owner sets can be modified         inside the directory. When a modified owner set is replaced, the         directory bits are written back to L2 (the line data is not         written). When the L2 cache misses, a group of lines is obtained         from the host software application memory and the directory bits         of these lines are set to zeros (no one owns the lines). At the         very end of an accelerated code fragment, when control returns         to software, the L1 and L2 caches are flushed all the way to the         application memory and invalidated. However, since the         supercomputer will likely have larger memory than the software         application, a designated unmapped memory region is available to         the accelerator only, and is not flushed to the host. (this area         is suitable for keeping, e.g., very large data structures with         local lexical scope in the accelerated code fragment). Each         directory unit has         -   one coherence slave port for receiving remote_store,             line_read, flush, or abandon messages from an L1 cache,         -   one coherence master port for sending remote_store,             line_read, and abandon messages to any L1 cache (flush             requests from a directory are sent only to the L2),         -   One L2 master port for sending line read and line flush             requests to L2. The line data, dirty byte mask and owner set             bits will be transmitted during a flush. When a cached owner             set is being flushed and the directory bits are nonzero             (meaning that an L1 cache owns the line) only the directory             bits are written to L2.

Each L2 cache has:

-   -   One slave port to receive line read and line flush requests from         a directory;     -   A host master port to send line read or line flush requests to         the host application memory; and     -   A cache array master port to read and write line data, tag and         directory bits from or to the attached DDRn DRAM unit on the         board, through the DDRn external communication device.         The memory hierarchy includes the following networks:     -   A one to one memory load/store network from a memory load/store         master port of the thread unit and the memory load/store slave         port of the corresponding L1 cache.     -   Two coherence networks:         -   Coherence network 1, for sending remote_store, line_read,             flush or abandon requests from an L1 cache to a directory             unit         -   Coherence network 2, for sending remote_store, line_read, or             abandon requests from a directory to an L1 cache unit     -   A directory_L2 one to one network for delivering line read/line         flush requests from a directory to an L2. The line data includes         the owner set bits.     -   A host communication network connecting each host master port of         each L2 cache to the slave port of the PCI express external         communication device, which in turn leads to the host         microprocessor.     -   A one to one L2 cache array network, to send pipelined data and         tag array read/write requests from the memory master port of         each L2 cache, and the slave port of the DDRn controller         external communication device.

This completes the structural description of the directory-based write-update cache, also shown in FIG. 16 . Note the one-to-one networks will finally be deleted after the partitioning/chip unioning stages, through network elision.

Appendix F. Algorithm for Creating and Connecting the Top Level Components of the Supercomputer Flat Design

The top level components of the supercomputer's flat design are created and connected as follows:

-   -   Create a new instance of the top task adapter, which has one         task master port facing the outermost program region thread unit         network, and one host master port facing the host communication         network (going toward PCI Express). This adapter does format         conversion of messages suitable for communication with the host         software.     -   Create a one-to-one network (topNw) to connect the top task         adapter and the thread unit for the outermost program region.     -   To create all the thread units, call the following recursive         procedure initially with createTasks(topRegion,topNw), where         topRegion is the outermost region in the program. This recursive         algorithm implements the hierarchical software pipelining         technique given in the section above entitled “Introduction to         the thread unit and hierarchical software pipelining”.         -   This top region is usually not a loop, but may contain             loops.

createTasks(Region r,Network parentNw) {  create a new instance t of   the thread unit for region r,  attach the task slave port of t to the parentNw  for each inner region r′ of r {   create the new task network childNw for r′   attach the task master port of t for r′, to childNw   for i=1 to loopReplicationCount(r′) {    createTasks (r′,childNw) ;   }  } } At this point, all the thread units have been created and wired to their task networks. Now, create a new instance of the memory hierarchy with

-   -   A number of memory load/store slave ports equal to the memory         load/store master ports on all the thread units.     -   A number of host master ports equal to the number of DDRn         connections     -   A number of L2 data array master ports equal to the number of         host master ports. These will communicate point to point with         the corresponding DDRn controller external communication device.     -   For i=0 to (number of host network master ports of the memory         hierarchy)−1 do         -   Connect the host master port of the memory hierarchy to the             host communication network         -   Create a new DDRn external communication device         -   Create a new one-to-one L2 cache array network to connect             the corresponding L2 cache array master port of the memory             hierarchy and the DDRn communication device slave port.     -   Create a new instance of the PCI Express communication device.     -   Connect the top task adapter host master port, and the PCI         Express unit slave port to the host communication network.     -   for each thread unit t         -   for each memory load/store master port of t             -   Create a new one-to-one memory load/store network and                 connect this memory load/store master port of t and the                 corresponding memory load/store slave port of the memory                 hierarchy.         -   For every other master port of t             -   Create a new complex operation unit (e.g., divider)                 matching the type of this master port             -   Create a new unique one-to-one network connecting this                 master port of t to the slave port of the complex                 operation unit

The unconnected wires in the above design are only: the PCI Express I/O signal connections (PCI Express lanes), and the DDRn I/O signal connections (e.g., driving a DRAM unit on the board). These will indeed be the I/O pins of the entire chip.

Appendix G. Greedy Deterministic Routing Algorithm for an Incomplete Hypercube

For clarity, we provide the greedy deterministic routing algorithm for an incomplete hypercube here. An incomplete hypercube has a number of nodes that is not a power of two, where the nodes are numbered with consecutive Gray code numbers starting at 0. For example, a 5 node incomplete 3-cube contains nodes with Gray code numbers 000, 001, 011, 010, 110 (the following nodes 111, 101, 100, which would be present in the 8 node complete 3-cube, are left out). As a result, for some nodes in the incomplete hypercube, some of the links to the potential neighbors are missing. For example, 110 is only linked to 010 (has link #2). 110's links to other potential neighbors (111 over link #0, 100 over link #1) are missing, because these neighbor nodes are missing.

Given that standard greedy deterministic routing on a complete hypercube from a node with Gray code number x to a node with Gray code numbery is done as follows:

-   -   Let z be (x xor y). Find the bit position k of the least         significant 1 bit in z. Send the message over link k.         -   For example a message sent from 110 to 001 would follow the             route: 110→111→101→001.

Greedy deterministic routing on an incomplete hypercube from a node with Gray code number x to a node with Gray code numbery, is similarly done as follows:

-   -   Let z be (x xor y). Find the bit position k of the least         significant 1 bit in z, such that flipping bit k in x yields a         neighbor number that exists in the incomplete hypercube. Send         the message over link k.         -   For example, a message from 110 to 001 in the 5 node             incomplete 3-cube would follow the route: 110→010→011→001.             Unlike the complete hypercube case, 110 cannot send to 111             or 100, since these nodes do not exist in the incomplete             hypercube.

Appendix H. Deep Profiler

The profiler tool is used to extract important information about the application. Its operation is shown in FIG. 66 . First, the original sequential program is instrumented at the assembly level such that special operations and function calls are placed at particular points of the program. The instrumented program code is then linked with the profiler library which includes definitions of the profiling functions inserted into the program in the previous step. The output of this step is an instrumented executable which is then executed with representative inputs. This execution produces detailed information about the dynamic behavior of the application. The deep profiler is different from the existing profiler tools in several aspects.

First, it can identify actual dependences between the load and store operations in the target program. This is achieved by instrumenting the application source code at a very fine granularity. The profiler inserts extra assembly instructions around all memory instructions such that the load/store addresses and data values are recorded in the subroutines that are called. This information is then used in dependence analysis. This dependence analysis gives the exact answer to the question of whether a dependency actually occurred at runtime between any two memory instructions (for that particular input and particular enclosing region). Using the exact profiler feedback on dependence information, the deep profiler can also cluster the memory instructions and identify opportunities for speculative execution.

The deep profiler records information about the locality and data access patterns of memory instructions, which can lead to several other optimizations (e.g., cache optimizations). It can also identify register/memory bits that are constant or redundant at runtime, which can be used to reduce the size of the executed operations and the size of the data stored or communicated. By keeping the number of times each basic block is visited, it can identify the hot basic blocks in the application.

The deep profiler can also detect the maximum parallelism in an application using various parallelism models (e.g., spawn-and-forget). It identifies the number of iterations for each loop and also using the dependency information, it can decide on the maximum and average number of loop thread units that can be spawned in parallel, as well as the maximum and average latency of a loop invocation.

The amount of information recorded by a profiler tool directly affects its runtime overheads. For efficiency purposes, the deep profiler employs a sampling technique. In this technique, the profiler generates an executable that contains both the original executable and the instrumented executable. Then, at runtime, the execution intermittently switches between the original and the profiled versions of the code. This enables profiling of even very large applications as a whole, without constraining the profiling to only some parts of the application.

Appendix I. Hardware-Software Partitioning

The method in the present document can be used to execute only some parts of the input sequential application in hardware. This requires a partitioning of the application into two parts, one that will be compiled into hardware and the other that will be compiled into a software executable that will be executed on a general purpose processor (i.e., the host machine).

The goal of the hardware-software partitioning technique to be described in this section is to automatically identify the best code fragments to convert to hardware. But such a technique will in general identify arbitrary sequential code fragments and will not be useful without an additional method that is indeed able to convert arbitrary sequential code fragments into parallel hardware. Thus, the general method to convert arbitrary code to hardware described in the present document and the hardware-software partitioning technique we are about to describe, work together to become useful.

FIG. 67 illustrates the result of application of hardware-software partitioning on a sequential application that comprises two source files, F1 and F2. One basic block of the procedure main in file F1 and the whole procedure P1 in file F2 are identified by the partitioner as program fragments that will be executed in hardware. The resulting parallel program contains the two source files where the accelerated regions are deleted and a call to a special startAccelerator subroutine is inserted at the entry point of the accelerated region. This call initiates execution of the hardware equivalent of the basic blocks that are carved out of the sequential program, by implementing the message exchange sequence given in the section above entitled “Communication interface with host computer”.

Referring to FIG. 68 , the detailed operation of the hardware-software partitioning technique is as follows. Before executing this algorithm, a hypergraph that represents the target application program is constructed. This hypergraph has the basic blocks of the application as its vertices and the memory data structures referenced by more than one of these basic blocks as hyperedges that connect those basic blocks. The vertices are weighted according to the estimated area required to implement the assembly instructions in the corresponding basic blocks in hardware. The edges are weighted according to the total number of accesses to the data structure. Then, the partitioning algorithm executes the computation shown in FIG. 68 . This algorithm consists of two loops, the outer loop terminating when the parts of the application that are moved to hardware meet either the area limit or the time percentage provided to the algorithm as parameters. At every iteration of this loop, first, a seed vertex is selected. This seed corresponds to the software basic block that has the highest execution time. Then, this seed is moved from software to hardware. In order to reduce the communication between software and hardware domains, all basic blocks that are closely related to this seed basic block need to be moved from software to hardware too. The second loop performs this task by examining all software basic blocks, calculating the total weight of the edges that connect them to the hardware basic blocks, and identifying the ones that have a total edge weight higher than a provided threshold. Whenever such a vertex is found, it is also moved to hardware.

There is an important point to emphasize in this algorithm. The inner loop considers not only the direct software neighbor basic blocks of the seed basic block, but all software basic blocks. This is because, the basic blocks that will be moved to hardware need not be connected to the seed directly with a branch, but an indirect connection via a shared data structure is also sufficient. In order to be able to move indirectly connected basic blocks to hardware, at every iteration, the inner loop recalculates the total weight of the hyperedges connecting a software basic blocks to all hardware basic blocks. This is necessary because, after every iteration of the inner loop, this value might change.

This algorithm aims to obtain the best performance with minimum area and to reduce communication.

It partitions the application at a basic block granularity as opposed to procedure granularity. As a result, un-executed or rarely executed portions of procedures are not moved to hardware.

In order to reduce the overhead of communication between hardware and software, the algorithm tries to put all basic blocks that access a data structure into the same domain, i.e., it tries to put all of them to either hardware or software. As a result, if a data structure is in the memory of the accelerator, then it preferably always stays there, and vice versa.

Appendix J. Dependence Analysis with Symbolic Execution

Various optimizations employed in the compiler require disambiguation of dependences across the memory instructions in the target program. For this purpose, first, a static program analysis pass is applied to extract information regarding these memory instructions.

The static analysis technique used in the compiler is a symbolic evaluation-based data flow analysis that can handle programs with arbitrary control flow, loops, and pointers. The algorithm for this analysis is given in FIG. 69 . This algorithm executes the target program symbolically and identifies symbolic program states at various points inside the program. A program state is a mathematical expression that represents the result of all possible executions of the program ending at that point. In order to correctly express information about loops, induction variables should be identified. For each loop, this iterative algorithm checks whether there are any induction variables of that loop that are not discovered yet. If there are any new induction variables, their values are frozen to symbolic value expressions that represent all possible values that the induction variable can take. Then, the program is re-executed symbolically in order to propagate the frozen values of the newly discovered induction variables to the rest of the program. This iterative induction variable detection process continues until a fixed-point is reached, in which case all induction variables in the program are identified and all program states (written in terms of the frozen values of induction variables) accurately represent all possible program executions.

FIG. 70 illustrates the result of applying symbolic execution to a program fragment with three loops. These loops are assigned index variables that are symbolic virtual iteration counters that starts from 0 and increments at the end of every iteration of the corresponding loop. Considering the example in FIG. 70 , the index variables of the i, j, and k loops in this program fragment are I, J, and K, respectively.

The first two loops (the i and j loops) build up a two-deep nested loop which reads from and writes to a two-dimensional array A. The third loop (the k loop) updates the elements of a one-dimensional array B. This program fragment is also annotated with the intermediate program states (PS) obtained from symbolic execution. As a result of symbolic execution, the variables i, j, k, which are incremented at every iteration of the corresponding loops, are discovered to be induction variables and their values are frozen to the symbolic expressions v1, v2, and v3, respectively. The logical assertions in the program states are expressed in terms of these induction variables.

As the next step, the detected induction variables need to be solved. As induction variables can have arbitrary dependences between them, a correct solution order should be used. In order to find this solution order, an induction variable dependence graph which has induction variables as vertices and induction variable dependences as edges is created. This graph can be easily built by syntactically analyzing the values of the induction variables (i) before entering (i.e., their loop entry edge expressions) and (ii) at the back edge (i.e., their loop back edge value expressions) of their associated loops. A traversal of the strongly connected components of this graph in topological order gives a correct solution order for the induction variables in the program. Solution of individual induction variables is a pattern matching process where the loop back edge expressions of induction variables are compared against a table of (loop back edge pattern, solution pattern) pairs. When a match is found, the corresponding solution pattern in the table is used to obtain the closed form solution of the induction variable. These solutions are expressed in terms of loop invariant variables and the index variables of enclosing loops. As an example, an entry in this table would be (v(i+1)v(i)+n, v(i)v(0)+i*n). This means that, if an induction variable loop back expression shows that the induction variable is incremented by n at each iteration, then its solution is its loop entry value expression (i.e., v(0)) incremented by i*n, where i is the index variable of the target loop The three induction variables in FIG. 70 also follow this pattern. As their loop entry values are all zero, their solutions are simply I, J, and K, respectively. As the next step, these closed form solutions are used in place of the frozen value expressions of induction variables in all symbolic program states obtained from symbolic execution.

The symbolic expressions obtained from symbolic evaluation-based data flow analysis are used to perform a dependence analysis between all instructions in the target program. The dependence analyzer uses the symbolic address, value, and predicate expressions (a predicate expression is a symbolic Boolean expression that represents the condition be satisfied for the program execution to reach this point) obtained for each memory instruction in the target program, and it performs the tests shown in FIG. 71 . The first test is to compute the logical conjunction of the two predicate expressions in order to prove that the two instructions are never executed on the same invocation of the program. For instance, the then and else parts of an acyclic code fragment simply can never be executed together in the same invocation of the program. As the next test, the two address expressions are compared, and if these address expressions are equal, then there exists a dependence. The GCD test is used to detect memory access patterns that do not intersect because they access interleaved elements, such as two instructions that access the even and odd elements of an array, respectively. The value expressions are compared to see whether two store instructions are involved in a silent store situation where their actual execution order is not important. The dependence analyzer also includes other tests, such as an Integer Fourier-Motzkin Elimination-based dependence test, that is more suitable to rule out dependences in array-intensive scientific applications and an overlap test that can be used to prove that two contiguous regions accessed by two memory operations do not overlap by examining the minimum and maximum addresses that they access.

Considering the running example in FIG. 70 and concentrating on the nested loop including the i and j loops, there is a single operation that accesses the memory. However, this operation gets translated into the following three instructions in IR:

I1: load R1=MEM[A+I*N+J+4

]

I2: add R1=R1+1

I3: store MEM[A+I*N+J]=R1

The first instruction reads the value at memory location A[I][J+4] into register R1, the second instruction increments the value at register R1, and the third instruction writes the value in register R1 into the memory location A[I][J]. Consequently, there are two memory instructions, namely, I₁ and I₃, and these two memory instructions can be involved in the following possible dependencies over the j-loop: (i) I₁-I₁ inter-iteration dependence, (ii) I₁-I₃ intra-iteration dependence, and (iii) I₁-I₃ inter-iteration dependence. Intra-iteration dependencies impose an order among memory operations within a single iteration of the target loop, whereas inter-iteration dependencies are used to define an order among memory operations across different iterations of the target loop. The dependence analysis pass analyzes these three possible dependences and tries to prove that these dependences cannot occur during any program execution by performing the following types of checks:

a. I₁-I₁ Inter-Iteration Dependence Over the j-Loop

The address expressions for the two memory instructions are:

Addr1: A+I*N+J′+4

Addr3: A+I*N+J″+4.

As the posed dependence analysis question targets the j-loop, the two expressions use the same index variable of the outer i-loop (i.e., both expressions refer to the same I), but have two distinct copies of the index variable of the j-loop (i.e., they refer to J′ and J″, respectively, where J′≠J″). Then, the dependence analysis checks whether these address expressions can be equal by trying to disprove:

Addr1-Addr3=0,

for all possible values of I, J′, and J″. Using the closed-form address expressions, this assertion becomes:

A+I*N+J′+4−A+I*N+J″+4=0,

J″−J′=0.

Using the fact that J′ and J″ refer to index variables of distinct iterations of the j-loop (i.e., J′≠J″), this assertion evaluates to false, which means that there is no dependence for this case.

b. I₁-I₃ Intra-Iteration Dependence Over the j-Loop

The intra-iteration analysis of the j-loop targets a single iteration. Therefore, both address expressions refer to the same index variable for the j-loop as well as the same index variable for the i-loop. This gives us the following logical assertion to disprove the existence of a dependence:

Addr1-Addr3=0,

A+I*N+J+4−A+I*N+J=0,

4=0

As this assertion evaluates to false, there is no dependence for this case.

c. I₁-I₃ inter-iteration dependence over the j-loop

Using different symbolic j-loop index variables for the address expressions of the two instructions (J′ and J″ with J′≠J″) but the same index variable for the i-loop, the following logical assertion is obtained:

Addr1-Addr3=0,

A+I*N+J′+4−A+I*N+J″=0,

J′+4-J″=0

This logical assertion holds for a constant dependence distance of 4, which means that a location accessed at one iteration by instruction I₁ will be accessed by instruction I₂ after four iterations, so there is a dependence.

Note that, in order to disambiguate dependences, the dependence analyzer not only compares the address expressions, but also performs other tests. These tests include, but are not limited to, comparison of value expressions to identify silent stores, applying overlap and GCD-tests, using path predicates to disprove simultaneous execution of memory instructions, converting the obtained equalities and loop bound inequalities to a linear system and applying integer Fourier-Motzkin elimination to prove that the system has no solution. Further, in case of dependences that can be proven to exist, the dependence analyzer can detect the dependence distance vector, which can lead to generation of specialized synchronization unit such as producer-consumer FIFO queues.

A dependence analysis, similar to the one applied to the j loop, can be performed for the i loop, which encloses the j loop. In case of inter-iteration dependences over the i loop, the dependences between one iteration of the i loop and another iteration of the same loop, over all possible iterations of the inner j loops in both iterations, are considered. Note that such a dependence check is useful to identify whether there are any dependences that prevent the target loop from being executed in parallel. For vectorization of the target loop, the posed dependence questions would be slightly different (for instance, the index variables of inner loops will be assumed to refer to not two different symbolic expressions, but the same symbolic expression). The symbolic execution-based analysis and the dependence analyzer discussed here are very general and can be used to answer many types of other dependence questions.

Although any static program analysis technique can be used to obtain information corresponding to the memory instructions in the target program, using symbolic execution for this purpose can extract more information and enable better disambiguation. No symbolic execution technique has been employed in any existing parallelizing compiler due to its high computational complexity which results in high execution time. However, various heuristics can be employed to make symbolic execution practical. For instance, in order to reduce the number of symbolic execution iterations over the target program, an explicitly named scalar variable (i.e., a scalar variable that is solely not accessed through pointers) whose value is updated inside a loop can be directly identified as an induction variable of the enclosing loop without performing symbolic execution. As a second heuristic, memoization of operations on symbolic expressions (e.g., multiplication of two symbolic expressions) can be used, which eliminates recomputation of the same operations over the same operands over and over again. One problem with symbolic execution is that, the size of the symbolic expressions grows exponentially during symbolic execution. In order to solve this problem, a limit on the maximum size for symbolic expressions can be placed so that all expressions that reach this limit are converted into symbolic unknown expressions. Finally, the number of logical assertions in a symbolic program state can be limited so that the look-up and update operations in the symbolic program state are performed efficiently.

Although its exponential behavior is unavoidable, these heuristics reduce the slowdown due to this behavior.

Appendix K. Algorithm for Creating the Configuration Memory of a Union Chip

Here we give an algorithm for creating the configuration SRAMs and registers for each partition.

• For each partition p    ○For each global componenty on the partition p      1. For each internal master port m of y connected to       partitioned network n, and connected to global       master port number m″ of network n        a. Find the local component x corresponding to global         component j on this partition p.        b. Find the internal master port m of component x, for         network n. Find the local network master port m′         that m is connected to.        c. Add (m″,m′) to the global master port to local master         port map, for this partitionp and network n.      2. For each internal slave port m of y connected to a       partitioned network n, and connected to global master       port number m″ of network n        a. Find the local component x corresponding to global        component j on this partition p.        b. Find the internal slave port m for network n, of         component x. Find the local network slave port m′         that m is connected to.        c. Add (m″,m′) to the global slave port to local slave         port map, for this partitionp and network n.       Now, complete each global master (slave) port to local       (slave) port map so that each missing global master       (slave) port in the map is routed to the local master       (slave) port connected to the I/O controller.       Note that non-partitioned networks do not require global       to local port translation. Global port number == local port       number for non-partitioned networks. • For each partition p    ○For each global componenty on the partition p      1. For each internal master port m of y connected to global       master port m″ of a partitioned network n         a. Add (m″,p) to the global master port to partition          id map for network n.      2. For each internal slave port m of j connected to global       slave port m″ of a partitioned network n         a. Add (m″,p) to the global slave port to partition          id map for network n.

For each partitioned task network n

For each partition p

-   -   If there is a component connected to network n in partition p         -   1. Set next partition id to             -   a. The next higher partition p′ which contains a                 component connected to n, if there is one             -   b. The smallest numbered partition p′ which contains a                 component connected to n, otherwise.     -   Else (if partition p does not contain any component connected to         n)         -   1. Set next partition id to an illegal value             -   a. (task requests of network n should never visit                 partition p)

For each partition p

For each local component x on the union chip

-   -   Let presence[x] be 1 if some global component is mapped to x on         partition p     -   Let presence[x] be 0, otherwise     -   Presence[#local components-1:0] constitutes the local component         presence mask for the partition. It can be used for powering off         components that are not present in the partition.

The invention has been shown and described with reference to a particular preferred embodiment. However, it is to be understood that the invention is not limited to that particular embodiment, and that various modifications, additions and alterations may be made to the invention by one skilled in the art without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A hardware system automatically compiled, by a compiler, from a single-threaded software program; where the single-threaded software program includes a recursive function f, which is defined to be a function that calls itself, where the recursive function f is implemented within the hardware system by a customized hardware unit comprising a finite state machine; where a plurality of copies of the customized hardware unit are interconnected by a task network, so that each customized hardware unit on the task network is able to send a task for implementing the recursive function f to any other customized hardware unit on the task network, or receive a task for implementing the recursive function f from any other customized hardware unit on the task network; where the act of the recursive function f calling itself is implemented within the customized hardware unit as follows: (i) if the task network is accepting tasks at a point of call, sending a task for implementing the callee recursive function f over the task network toward another customized hardware unit on the task network; (ii) otherwise, if the task network is not accepting tasks at the point of call, performing the callee recursive function f locally inside the customized hardware unit with an ordinary recursive call, without sending any task to the task network at the point of call; for the purposes of avoiding a deadlock resulting from all customized hardware units on the task network having to wait after the task network gets filled with tasks, ensuring forward progress, and achieving high task parallelism in addition to fine-grain parallelism; where the hardware system is functionally equivalent to the single-threaded software program that the hardware system is compiled from; and where design of the hardware system is partitioned and further comprises: a. a plurality of finite-state machines and a plurality of memory units; b. networks connected to the plurality of finite-state machines and the plurality of memory units for managing task invocations in hardware and memory data transfers in hardware; c. a hardware synchronization unit to ensure executing memory instructions in the same order as within the single threaded software program; and d. a coherent memory hierarchy which signals completion of memory instructions for supporting the hardware synchronization unit.
 2. The hardware system of claim 1, where the recursive function f calls itself indirectly, successively calling one or more intermediate functions f₂, f₃, . . . f_(n), where f calls f₂, f₂ calls f₃, . . . and f_(n) finally calls f. 